AU5555699A - Compositions and uses for vision and memory disorders - Google Patents

Compositions and uses for vision and memory disorders Download PDF

Info

Publication number
AU5555699A
AU5555699A AU55556/99A AU5555699A AU5555699A AU 5555699 A AU5555699 A AU 5555699A AU 55556/99 A AU55556/99 A AU 55556/99A AU 5555699 A AU5555699 A AU 5555699A AU 5555699 A AU5555699 A AU 5555699A
Authority
AU
Australia
Prior art keywords
straight
branched chain
alkyl
alkenyl
phenyl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
AU55556/99A
Inventor
Gregory S. Hamilton
Douglas T. Ross
Hansjorg Sauer
Joseph P. Steiner
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
GPI Nil Holdings Inc
Original Assignee
Guilford Pharmaceuticals Inc
GPI Nil Holdings Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Guilford Pharmaceuticals Inc, GPI Nil Holdings Inc filed Critical Guilford Pharmaceuticals Inc
Publication of AU5555699A publication Critical patent/AU5555699A/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A61K31/401Proline; Derivatives thereof, e.g. captopril
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A61K31/4025Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings, e.g. cromakalim
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/425Thiazoles
    • A61K31/4261,3-Thiazoles
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/4427Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof containing further heterocyclic ring systems
    • A61K31/4439Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof containing further heterocyclic ring systems containing a five-membered ring with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. omeprazole
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/445Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/12Ophthalmic agents for cataracts

Description

WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 1 COMPOSITIONS AND USES FOR VISION AND MEMORY DISORDERS BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 5 1. Field of Invention This invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions and methods for treating vision loss, preventing vision degeneration, and promoting vision regeneration ("neopsis") 10 using low molecular weight, small molecule derivatives. 2. Description of Related Art The visual system is composed of the eyes, ocular adnexa and the visual pathways. Dysfunction of the visual system 15 may lead to permanent or temporary visual impairment, i.e. a deviation from normal in one or more functions of the eye. Visual impairment manifests itself in various ways and includes a broad range of visual dysfunctions and disturbances. Without limitation, these dysfunctions and 20 disturbances include partial or total loss of vision, the need for correction of visual acuity for objects near and far, loss of visual field, impaired ocular motility without diplopia (double vision), impaired or skewed color perception, limited adaptation to light and dark, diminished 25 accommodation, metamorphopsic distortion, impaired binocular vision, paresis of accommodation, iridoplegia, entropion, ectropion, epiphora, lagophthalmos, and scarring. See Physicians' Desk Reference (PDR) for Ophthalmology, 16th Edition, 6:47 (1988). The visual system may be adversely 30 affected by various ophthalmologic disorders, diseases, injuries, and complications, including, without limitation, genetic disorders; [non-genetic disorders;] disorders associated with aging or degenerative diseases; disorders correlating to physical injury to the eye, head, or other SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 2 parts of the body resulting from external forces; disorders resulting from environmental factors; disorders resulting from a broad range of diseases; and combinations of any of the above. 5 The visual system is a complex system composed of numerous components. Visual impairment can involve the entire visual system, any one component, or any combination of components, depending upon the precise nature of the circumstances. The eye is composed of a lens, which is 10 suspended in the zonules of Zinn and is focused by the ciliary body. The ciliary body also secretes aqueous humor, which fills the posterior chamber, passes through the pupil into the anterior chamber, then drains primarily via the canal of Schlemm. The iris regulates the quantity of light 15 entering the eye by adjusting the size of its central opening, the pupil. A visual image is focused onto the retina, the fovea centralis being the retinal area of sharpest visual acuity. The conjunctiva is the mucus membrane which lines the eyelids and the eyeball, and ends 20 abruptly at the limbus conjunctivae, the edge of the conjunctiva overlapping the cornea. The cornea is the clear, transparent anterior portion of the fibrous coat of the eye; it is important in light refraction and is covered with an epithelium that differs in many respects from the 25 conjunctival epithelium. The retina is the innermost, light sensitive portion of the eye, containing two types of photoreceptors, cones, which are responsible for color vision in brighter light, and rods, which are essential for vision in dim light but do not 30 perceive colors. After light passes through the cornea, lens system, and the vitreous humor, it enters the retina from the inside; that is, it passes through the ganglion cells and nerve fibers, the inner and outer plexiform layers, the inner and outer nuclear layers, and the internal and external 35 limiting membranes before it finally reaches the layer of SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 3 photoreceptors located near the outside of the retina, just inside the outermost pigment epithelium layer. The cells of the pigment epithelium layer act as an anatomical barrier to liquids and substances located outside of the eye, forming 5 the "blood-retina" barrier, and provide nourishment, oxygen, a source of functionally useful substances like vitamin A, and phagocytosis of decomposition products to photoreceptor cells. There is no anatomical connection between the pigment epithelium and the photoreceptor layer, permitting separation 10 of the layers in some pathological situations. When rods or cones are excited by light, signals are transmitted through successive neurons in the retina itself, into the optic nerve fibers, and ultimately to the cerebral cortex. Both rods and cones contain molecules that decompose 15 on exposure to light and, in the process, excite the nerve fibers leading from the eye. The molecule in rods is rhodopsin. The three light-sensitive molecules in cones, collectively called iodopsin, have compositions only slightly different from that of rhodopsin and are maximally excited by 20 red, blue, or green light, respectively. Neither rods nor cones generate action potentials. Rather, the light-induced membrane hyperpolarization generated in the outer, photosensitive segment of a rod or cone cell is transmitted from the outer segment through the 25 inner segment to the synaptic body by direct conduction of the electrical voltage itself, a process called electrotonic conduction. At the synaptic body, the membrane potential controls the release of an unknown transmitter molecule. In low light, rod and cone cell membranes are depolarized and 30 the rate of transmitter release is greatest. Light-induced hyperpolarization causes a marked decrease in the release of transmitter molecules. The transmitters released by rod and cone cells induce signals in the bipolar neurons and horizontal cells. The 35 signals in both these cells are also transmitted by SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 4 electrotonic conduction and not by action potential. The rod bipolar neurons connect with as many as 50 rod cells, while the dwarf and diffuse bipolar cells connect with one or several cone cells. A depolarizing bipolar cell is 5 stimulated when its connecting rods or cones are exposed to light. The release of transmitter molecules inhibits the depolarizing bipolar cell. Therefore, in the dark, when the rods and cones are secreting large quantities of transmitter molecules, the depolarizing bipolar cells are inhibited. In 10 the light, the decrease in release of transmitter molecules from the rods and cones reduces the inhibition of the bipolar cell, allowing it to become excited. In this manner, both positive and negative signals can be transmitted through different bipolar cells from the rods and cones to the 15 amacrine and ganglion cells. As their name suggests, horizontal cells project horizontally in the retina, where they may synapse with rods, cones, other horizontal cells, or a combination of cells types. The function of horizontal cells is unclear, although 20 some mechanism in the convergence of photoreceptor signaling has been postulated. All types of bipolar cells connect with ganglion cells, which are of two primary types. A-type ganglion cells predominately connect with rod bipolar cells, while B-type 25 ganglion cells predominately connect with dwarf and diffuse bipolar cells. It appears that A-type ganglion cells are sensitive to contrast, light intensity, and perception of movement, while B-type ganglion cells appear more concerned with color vision and visual acuity. 30 Like horizontal cells, the Amacrine cells horizontally synapse with several to many other cells, in this case bipolar cells, ganglion cells, and other Amacrine cells. The function of Amacrine cells is also unclear. The axons of ganglion cells carry signals into the nerve 35 fiber layer of the eye, where the axons converge into fibers SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 5 which further converge at the optic disc, where they exit the eye as the optic nerve. The ganglion cells transmit their signals through the optic nerve fibers to the brain in the form of action potentials. These cells, even when 5 unstimulated, transmit continuous nerve impulses at an average, baseline rate of about 5 per second. The visual signal is superimposed onto this baseline level of ganglion cell stimulation. It can be either an excitatory signal, with the number of impulses increasing above the baseline 10 rate, or an inhibitory signal, with the number of nerve impulses decreasing below the baseline rate. As part of the central nervous system, the eye is in some ways an extension of the brain; as such, it has a limited capacity for regeneration. This limited regeneration 15 capacity further complicates the challenging task of improving vision, resolving dysfunction of the visual system, and/or treating or preventing ophthalmologic disorders. Many disorders of the eye, such as retinal photic injury, retinal ischemia-induced eye injury, age-related macular 20 degeneration, free radical-induced eye diseases, as well as numerous other disorders, are considered to be entirely untreatable. Other ophthalmologic disorders, e.g., disorders causing permanent visual impairment, are corrected only by the use of ophthalmic devices and/or surgery, with varying 25 degrees of success. The immunosuppressant drugs FK506, rapamycin, and cyclosporin are well known as potent T-cell specific immunosuppressants, and are effective against autoimmunity, transplant or graft rejection, inflammation, allergic 30 responses, other autoimmune or immune-mediated diseases, and infectious diseases. It has been disclosed that application of Cyclosporin, FK-506, Rapamycin, Buspirone, Spiperone, and/or their derivatives are effective in treating some ophthalmologic disorders of these types. Several 35 ophthalmologic disorders or vision problems are known to be SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 6 associated with autoimmune and immunologically-mediated activities; hence, immunomodulatory compounds are expected to demonstrate efficacy for treating those types of ophthalmologic disorders or vision problems. 5 The effects of FK506, Rapamycin, and related agents in the treatment of ophthalmologic diseases are disclosed in several U.S. patents (Goulet et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,532,248; Mochizuki et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,514,686; Luly et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,457,111; Russo et al., U.S. Patent 10 No. 5,441,937; Kulkarni, U.S. Patent No. 5,387,589; Asakura et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,368,865; Goulet et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,258,389; Armistead et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,192,773; Goulet et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,189,042; and Fehr, U.S. Patent No. 5,011,844). These patents claim FK506 or 15 Rapamycin related compounds and disclose the known use of FK506 or Rapamycin related compounds in the treatment of ophthalmologic disorders in association with the known immunosuppressive effects of FK506 and Rapamycin. The compounds disclosed in these patents are relatively large. 20 Further, the cited patents relate to immunomodulatory compounds limited to treating autoimmunity or related diseases, or immunologically-mediated diseases, for which the efficacy of FK506 and Rapamycin is well known. Other U.S. patents disclose the use of cyclosporin, 25 Spiperone, Buspirone, their derivatives, and other immunosuppressive compounds for use in the treatment of ophthalmologic diseases (Sharpe et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,703,088; Sharpe et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,693,645; Sullivan, U.S. Patent No. 5,688,765; Sullivan, U.S. Patent 30 No. 5,.620,921; Sharpe et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,574,041; Eberle, U.S. Patent No. 5,284,826; Sharpe et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,244,902; Chiou et al., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,198,454 and 5,194,434; and Kaswan, U.S. Patent No. 4,839,342). These patents also relate to compounds useful for treating 35 autoimmune diseases and cite the known use of cyclosporin, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 7 Spiperone, Buspirone, their derivatives, and other immunosuppressive compounds in treating ocular inflammation and other immunologically-mediated ophthalmologic diseases. The immunosuppressive compounds disclosed in the prior 5 art suppress the immune system, by definition, and also exhibit other toxic side effects. Accordingly, there is a need for non-immunosuppressant, small molecule compounds, and compositions and methods for use of such compounds, that are useful in improving vision; preventing, treating, and/or 10 repairing visual impairment or dysfunction of the visual system; and preventing, treating, and/or resolving ophthalmologic disorders. There are also a number of patents on non immunosuppressive compounds disclosing methods of use for 15 permitting or promoting wound healing (whether from injury or surgery); controlling intraocular pressure (often resulting from glaucoma) ; controlling neurodegenerative eye disorders, including damage or injury to retinal neurons, damage or injury to retinal ganglion cells, and macular degeneration; 20 stimulating neurite outgrowth; preventing or reducing oxidative damage caused by free radicals; and treating impaired oxygen and nutrient supply, as well as impaired waste product removal, resulting from low blood flow. These non-immunosuppressive substances fall into one of two general 25 categories: naturally occurring molecules, such as proteins, glycoproteins, peptides, hormones, and growth factors; and synthetic molecules. Within the group of naturally occurring non immunosuppressive molecules, several hormones, growth 30 factors, and signaling molecules have been patented for use as supplements to naturally occurring quantities of such molecules, as well as for targeting of specific cells where the particular molecule does not naturally occur in a mature individual. These patents generally claim methods of use for 35 reducing or preventing the symptoms of ocular disease, or SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 8 arresting or reversing vision loss. Specifically, Louis et al., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,736,516 and 5,641,749, disclose the use of a glial cell line derived neurotrophic factor (GDNF) to stop or reverse the 5 degeneration of retinal neurons (i.e. photoreceptors) and retinal ganglion cells caused by glaucoma, or other degenerative or traumatic retinal diseases or injuries. O'Brien, et al., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,714,459 and 5,700,909, disclose the use of a glycoprotein, Saposin, and its 10 derivatives for stimulating neurite outgrowth and increasing myelination. To stop or reverse degeneration of retinal neurons, LaVail et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,667,968, discloses the use of a variety of neurotrophic proteins, including brain-derived neurotrophic factor, ciliary neurotrophic 15 factor, neurotrophin-3 or neurotrophin-4, acidic or basic fibroblast growth factors, interleukin, tumor necrosis factor-a, insulin-like growth factor-2 and other growth factors. Wong et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,632,984, discloses the use of interferons, especially interferon a-2a, for 20 treating the symptoms of macular degeneration by reducing hemorrhage and limiting neovascularization. Finally, Wallace et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,441,937, discloses the use of a lung-derived neurotrophic factor (NTF) to maintain the functionality of ciliary ganglion and parasympathetic neuron 25 cells. A key characteristic of factors derived from specific cell lines is their localization to specific cell lines or tissues; systemic treatment with these molecules would run a substantial risk of unintended, and potentially dangerous, 30 effects in cell lines where the genes encoding these molecules are inactive. Similarly, hormones and growth factors often activate a large number of genes in many cell lines; again, non-localized application of these molecules would run a substantial risk of provoking an inappropriate, 35 and potentially dangerous, response. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 9 Within the category of synthetic molecules, most of the patented compounds are immunosuppressive and disclose uses in treating inflammatory, autoimmune, and allergic responses, as discussed above. A few others are non-immunosuppressive and 5 claim the ability to treat cellular degeneration, and in some cases promote cellular regeneration, most often in the context of their antioxidant properties. Specifically, Tso et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,527,533, discloses the use of astaxanthin, a carotenoid antioxidant, 10 for preventing or reducing photoreceptor damage resulting from the presence of free radicals. Similarly, Babcock et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,252,319, discloses the use of antioxidant aminosteroids for treating eye disease and injury, by increasing resistance to oxidative damage. 15 Freeman, U.S. Patent No. 5,468,752, discloses the use of the antiviral phosphonylmethoxyalkylcytosines to reduce abnormally increased intraocular pressure. Hamilton and Steiner disclose in U.S. Patent No. 5,614,547 novel pyrrolidine carboxylate compounds which bind 20 to the immunophilin FKBP12 and stimulate nerve growth, but which lack immunosuppressive effects. Unexpectedly, it has been discovered that these non-immunosuppressant compounds promote improvements in vision and resolve ophthalmologic disorders. Yet their novel small molecule structure and non 25 immunosuppressive properties differentiate them from FK506 and related immunosuppressive compounds found in the prior art. Further, these compounds may be differentiated from the non-immunosuppressive compounds used to treat vision 30 disorders by their novel small molecule structure and their lack of general, systemic effects. Naturally occurring hormones, growth factors, cytokines, and signaling molecules are generally multifunctional and activate many genes in diverse cell lines. The present compounds do not, thus 35 avoiding the unexpected, and potentially dangerous, side SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 10 effects of systemic use. Similarly, the present compounds also avoid the potential unexpected side effects of introducing cell line-specific molecules into other cell lines were they do not naturally occur. 5 SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to the surprising discovery that non-immunosuppressive immunophilin ligands, i.e. inhibitors or binding agents, may be useful for treating 10 a vision disorder, improving vision, treating memory impairment or enhancing memory performance in an animal. Accordingly, novel compositions and methods of using non immunosuppressive immunophilin ligands are provided. A preferred feature of the compounds of the present invention 15 is that they do not exert any significant immunosuppressive activity. Preferred embodiments of this invention also include methods and compositions wherein the non-immunosuppressive immunophilin ligand has an affinity for FKBP-type 20 immunophilins, and in particular FKBP-12. Preferred FKBP-type non-immunosuppressive immunophilin ligands include without limitation small molecule heterocyclic ring compounds having a first and second substituent group attached thereto wherein the first 25 substituent group comprises i) an acidic moiety or ii) an alkyl, alkenyl, alkylaryl, alkenylaryl or group otherwise exemplified herein which is linked to the heterocyclic ring by an ester, thioester, amide, amine, ketone linkage, or a variation as disclosed herein, and wherein the second 30 substituent group comprises an alkyl, alkenyl, alkylaryl, alkenylaryl, or group otherwise exemplified herein which is linked to the heterocyclic ring by a diketo, thiocarbonyl, carbamate, urea, sulfonyl, or a linkage as exemplified herein. 35 Preferred embodiments of the invention include methods SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 11 and compositions using a compound selected from formulas (I) (XXIX) . Brief Description of the Drawings 5 Figure 1 A, B and C show that GPI 1046 protects retinal ganglion cells against degeneration following retinal ischemia. Figure 2 shows that GPI 1046 prevents degeneration of optic 10 nerve axons and myelin following retinal ischemia. Figure 3 shows that GPI 1046 provides moderate protection against retinal ganglion cell death after optic nerve transection. 15 Figure 4 shows that GPI 1046 treatment duration significantly affects the process of optic nerve axonal degeneration after transection. 20 Figure 5 shows that GPI 1046 treatment produces a greater effect on optic nerve axons than ganglion cell bodies. Figure 6 shows that GPI 1046 treatment for 28 days after optic nerve transection prevents myelin degeneration in the 25 proximal stump. Figure 7 shows that FKBP-12 immunohistochemistry labels oligodendroglia (large dark cells with fibrous processes), the cells which produce myelin, located between the fascicles 30 of optic nerve fibers, and also some optic nerve axons. Figure 8 shows GPI 1046 treatment for 28 days after optic nerve transection prevents myelin degeneration in the distal stump. 35 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 12 Figure 9 shows that 28 day treatment with GPI 1046 treatment beginning 8 weeks after onset of streptozotocin induced diabetes decreases the extent of neovascularization in the inner and outer retina and protects neurons in the inner 5 nuclear layer (INL) and ganglion cell layer (GCL) from degeneration. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Definitions 10 "Eye" refers to the anatomical structure responsible for vision in humans and other animals, and encompasses the following anatomical structures, without limitation: lens, vitreous body, ciliary body, posterior chamber, anterior chamber, pupil, cornea, iris, canal of Schlemm, zonules of 15 Zinn, limbus, conjunctiva, choroid, retina, central vessels of the retina, optic nerve, fovea centralis, macula lutea, and sclera. ".GPI 1605" refers to a compound of formula S N HN 1O GPI 1605 20 "GPI 1046" refers to 3- (3-pyridyl) -1-propyl (2s) -1- (3, 3 dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, a compound of formula N NN 0 GPI1046 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 13 "GPI 1312" refers to a compound of formula o=s=o o GPI 1312 "GPI 1572" refers to a compound of formula 5 N o 0 0 0 GPI 1572 "GPI 1389" refers to a compound of formula N N 0 0 ot( GPI 1389 10 "GPI 1511" refers to a compound of formula Ny 0 0 0 1GPI 1511 "GPI 1234" refers to a compound of formula N 0 0 0 GPI 1234 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 14 "Isomers" refer to different compounds that have the same molecular formula. "Stereoisomers" are isomers that differ only in the way the atoms are arranged in space. "Enantiomers" are a pair of stereoisomers that are non 5 superimposable mirror images of each other. "Diastereoisomers" are stereoisomers which are not mirror images of each other. "Racemic mixture" means a mixture containing equal parts of individual enantiomers. "Non racemic mixture" is a mixture containing unequal parts of 10 individual enantiomers or stereoisomers. "Enhancing memory performance" refers to improving or increasing the mental faculty by which to register, retain or recall past experiences, knowledge, ideas, sensations, thoughts or impressions. 15 "Memory impairment" refers to a diminished mental registration, retention or recall of past experiences, knowledge, ideas, sensations, thoughts or impressions. Memory impairment may affect short and long-term information retention, facility with spatial relationships, memory 20 (rehearsal) strategies, and verbal retrieval and production. Common causes of memory impairment are age, severe head trauma, brain anoxia or ischemia, alcoholic-nutritional diseases, and drug intoxications. Examples of memory impairment include, without limitation, benign forgetfulness, 25 amnesia and any disorder in which memory deficiency is present, such as Korsakoff's amnesic psychosis, dementia and learning disorders. "Neopsic factors" or "neopsics" refers to compounds useful in treating vision loss, preventing vision 30 degeneration, or promoting vision regeneration. "Neopsis" refers to the process of treating vision loss, preventing vision degeneration, or promoting vision regeneration. "Ophthalmological" refers to anything about or 35 concerning the eye, without limitation, and is used SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 15 interchangeably with "ocular," "ophthalmic," "ophthalmologic," and other such terms, without limitation. "Pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate" refers to a salt, ester, or solvate of a subject compound 5 which possesses the desired pharmacological activity and which is neither biologically nor otherwise undesirable. A salt, ester, or solvate can be formed with inorganic acids such as acetate, adipate, alginate, aspartate, benzoate, benzenesulfonate, bisulfate, butyrate, citrate, camphorate, 10 camphorsulfonate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, fumarate, glucoheptanoate, gluconate, glycerophosphate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, 2 hydroxyethanesulfonate, lactate, maleate, methanesulfonate, 15 naphthylate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, oxalate, sulfate, thiocyanate, tosylate and undecanoate. Examples of base salts, esters, or solvates include ammonium salts; alkali metal salts, such as sodium and potassium salts; alkaline earth metal salts, such as calcium and magnesium 20 salts; salts with organic bases, such as dicyclohexylamine salts; N-methyl-D-glucamine; and salts with amino acids, such as arginine, lysine, and so forth. Also, the basic nitrogen containing groups can be quarternized with such agents as lower alkyl halides, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl 25 chlorides, bromides, and iodides; dialkyl sulfates, such as dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl, and diamyl sulfates; long chain halides, such as decyl, lauryl, myristyl, and stearyl chlorides, bromides, and iodides; aralkyl halides, such as benzyl and phenethyl bromides; and others. Water or oil 30 soluble or dispersible products are thereby obtained. "Preventing vision degeneration" refers to the ability to prevent degeneration of vision in patients newly diagnosed as having a degenerative disease affecting vision, or at risk of developing a new degenerative disease affecting vision, 35 and for preventing further degeneration of vision in patients SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 16 who are already suffering from or have symptoms of a degenerative disease affecting vision. "Promoting vision regeneration" refers to maintaining, improving, stimulating or accelerating recovery of, or 5 revitalizing one or more components of the visual system in a manner which improves or enhances vision, either in the presence or absence of any ophthalmologic disorder, disease, or injury. "Treating" refers to: 10 (i) preventing a disease and/or condition from occurring in a subject which may be predisposed to the disease and/or condition but has not yet been diagnosed as having it; (ii) inhibiting the disease and/or condition, i.e., 15 arresting its development; or (iii) relieving the disease and/or condition, i.e., causing regression of the disease and/or condition. "Vision" refers to the ability of humans and other animals to process images, and is used interchangeably with 20 "sight", "seeing", and other such terms, without limitation. "Vision disorder" refers to any disorder that affects or involves vision, including without limitation visual impairment, orbital disorders, disorders of the lacrimal apparatus, disorders of the eyelids, disorders of the 25 conjunctiva, disorders of the cornea, cataracts, disorders of the uveal tract, disorders of the retina, disorders of the optic nerve or visual pathways, free radical induced eye disorders and diseases, immunologically-mediated eye disorders and diseases, eye injuries, and symptoms and 30 complications of eye disease, eye disorder, or eye injury. "Visual impairment" refers to any dysfunction in vision including without limitation disturbances or diminution in vision (e.g., binocular, central, peripheral, scotopic), visual acuity for objects near and far, visual field, ocular 35 motility, color perception, adaptation to light and dark, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 17 accommodation, refraction, and lacrimation. See Physician's Desk Reference (PDR) for Ophthalmology, 16t Edition, 6:47 (1988). 5 Methods of the Present Invention The present invention relates to a method of treating a vision disorder, improving vision, treating memory impairment, or enhancing memory performance in an animal, which comprises administering to said animal an effective 10 amount of a derivative. The inventive methods are particularly useful for treating various eye disorders including but not limited to visual disorders, diseases, injuries, and complications, genetic disorders; disorders associated with aging or 15 degenerative vision diseases; vision disorders correlating to physical injury to the eye, head, or other parts of the body resulting from external forces; vision disorders resulting from environmental factors; vision disorders resulting from a broad range of diseases; and combinations of any of the 20 above. In particular, the compositions and methods of the present invention are useful for improving vision, or correcting, treating, or preventing visual (ocular) impairment or dysfunction of the visual system, including 25 permanent and temporary visual impairment, without limitation. The present invention is also useful in preventing and treating ophthalmologic diseases and disorders, treating damaged and injured eyes, and preventing and treating diseases, disorders, and injuries which result 30 in vision deficiency, vision loss, or reduced capacity to see or process images, and the symptoms and complications resulting from same. The eye diseases and disorders which may be treated or prevented by the compositions and methods of the present invention are not limited with regard to the 35 cause of said diseases or disorders. Accordingly, said SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 18 compositions and methods are applicable whether the disease or disorder is caused by genetic or environmental factors, as well as any other influences. The compositions and methods of the present invention are particularly useful for eye 5 problems or vision loss or deficiency associated with all of the following, without limitation: aging, cellular or physiological degeneration, central nervous system or neurological disorder, vascular defects, muscular defects, and exposure to adverse environmental conditions or 10 substances. The compositions and methods of the present invention are particularly useful in correcting, treating, or improving visual impairment, without limitation. Visual impairment in varying degrees occurs in the presence of a deviation from 15 normal in one or more functions of the eye, including (1) visual acuity for objects at distance and near; (2) visual fields;, and (3) ocular motility without diplopia. See Physicians' Desk Reference (PDR) for Ophthalmology, 16th Edition, 6:47 (1988). Vision is imperfect without the 20 coordinated function of all three. Id. Said compositions and methods of use are also useful in correcting, treating, or improving other ocular functions including, without limitation, color perception, adaptation to light and dark, accommodation, metamorphopsia, and 25 binocular vision. The compositions and methods of use are particularly useful in treating, correcting, or preventing ocular disturbances including, without limitation, paresis of accommodation, iridoplegia, entropion, ectropion, epiphora, lagophthalmos, scarring, vitreous opacities, non-reactive 30 pupil, light scattering disturbances of the cornea or other media, and permanent deformities of the orbit. The compositions and methods of use of the present invention are also highly useful in improving vision and treating vision loss. Vision loss ranging from slight loss 35 to absolute loss may be treated or prevented using said SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 19 compositions and methods of use. Vision may be improved by the treatment of eye disorders, diseases, and injuries using the compositions and methods of the invention. However, improvements in vision using the compositions and methods of 5 use are not so limited, and may occur in the absence of any such disorder, disease, or injury. The compositions and methods of the present invention are also useful in the treatment or prevention of the following non-limiting exemplary diseases and disorders, and 10 symptoms and complications resulting therefrom. Vision disorders include but are not limited to the following: visual impairment, such as diminished visual acuity for objects near and far, visual fields, and ocular motility; 15 orbital disorders, such as orbital cellulitis, periorbital cellulitis, cavernous sinus thrombosis, and exophthalmos (proptosis); disorders of the lacrimal apparatus, such as dacryostenosis, congenital dacryostenosis, and dacryocystitis 20 (acute or chronic); disorders of the eyelids, such as lid edema, blepharitis, ptosis, Bell's palsy, blepharospasm, hordeolum (stye) , external hordeolum, internal hordeolum (meibomian stye) , chalazion, entropion (inversion of the eyelid), 25 ectropion (eversion of the eyelid), tumors (benign and malignant) , xanthelasma, basil cell carcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, meibomian gland carcinoma, and melanoma; disorders of the conjunctiva, such as pinguecula, pterygium, and other neoplasms, acute conjunctivitis, chronic 30 conjunctivitis, adult gonococcal conjunctivitis, neonatal conjunctivitis, trachoma (granular conjunctivitis or Egyptian ophthalmia), inclusion conjunctivitis (inclusion blenorrhea or swimming pool conjunctivitis) , neonatal inclusion conjunctivitis, adult inclusion conjunctivitis, vernal 35 keratoconjunctivitis, keratoconjunctivitis sicca (keratitis SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 20 sicca or dry eye syndrome), episcleritis, scleritis, cicatricial pemphigoid (ocular cicatricial pemphigoid or benign mucous membrane pemphigoid) , and subconjunctival hemorrhage; 5 disorders of the cornea, such as superficial punctate keratitis, corneal ulcer, indolent ulcer, recurrent corneal erosion, corneal epithelial basement membrane dystrophy, corneal endothelial cell dystrophy, herpes simplex keratitis (herpes simplex keratoconjunctivitis), dendritic keratitis, 10 disciform keratitis, ophthalmic herpes zoster, phlyctenular keratoconjunctivitis (phlyctenular or eczematous conjunctivitis), interstitial keratitis (parenchymatous keratitis), peripheral ulcerative keratitis (marginal keratolysis or peripheral rheumatoid ulceration), 15 keratomalacia (xerotic keratitis), xerophthalmia, keratoconus, bullous keratopathy; cataracts, including developmental or congenital cataracts, juvenile or adult cataracts, nuclear cataract, posterior subcapsular cataracts; 20 disorders of the uveal tract, such as uveitis (inflammation of the uveal tract or retina) , anterior uveitis, intermediate uveitis, posterior uveitis, iritis, cyclitis, choroiditis, ankylosing spondylitis, Reiter's syndrome, pars planitis, toxoplasmosis, cytomegalovirus 25 (CMV), acute retinal necrosis, toxocariasis, birdshot choroidopathy, histoplasmosis (presumed ocular histoplasmosis syndrome), Behcet's syndrome, sympathetic ophthalmia, Vogt Koyanagi-Harada syndrome, sarcoidosis, reticulum cell sarcoma, large cell lymphoma, syphilis, tuberculosis, 30 juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, endophthalmitis, and malignant melanoma of the choroid; disorders of the retina, such as vascular retinopathies (e.g., arteriosclerotic retinopathy and hypertensive retinopathy) , central and branch retinal artery occlusion, 35 central and branch retinal vein occlusion, diabetic SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 21 retinopathy (e.g., proliferative retinopathy and non proliferative retinopathy) , macular degeneration of the aged (age-related macular degeneration or senile macular degeneration), neovascular macular degeneration, retinal 5 detachment, retinitis pigmentosa, retinal photic injury, retinal ischemia-induced eye injury, and glaucoma (e.g., primary glaucoma, chronic open-angle glaucoma, acute or chronic angle-closure, congenital (infantile) glaucoma, secondary glaucoma, and absolute glaucoma); 10 disorders of the optic nerve or visual pathways, such as papilledema (choked disk), papillitis (optic neuritis), retrobulbar neuritis, ischemic optic neuropathy, toxic amblyopia, optic atrophy, higher visual pathway lesions, disorders of ocular motility (e.g., third cranial nerve 15 palsies, fourth cranial nerve palsies, sixth cranial nerve palsies, internuclear ophthalmoplegia, and gaze palsies); free radical induced eye disorders and diseases; and immunologically-mediated eye disorders and diseases, such as Graves' ophthalmopathy, conical cornea, dystrophia 20 epithelialis corneae, corneal leukoma, ocular pemphigus, Mooren's ulcer, scleritis, and sarcoidosis (See The Merck Manual, Sixteenth Edition, 217:2365-2397 (1992) and The Eye Book, Cassel, Billig, and Randall, The Johns Hopkins University Press (1998)). 25 The compositions and methods of the present invention are also useful in the treatment of the following non limiting eye injuries, and symptoms and complications resulting therefrom: conjunctival and corneal foreign body injuries, corneal abrasion, intraocular foreign body 30 injuries, lacerations, lid lacerations, contusions, lid contusions (black eye) , trauma to the globe, laceration of the iris, cataract, dislocated lens, glaucoma, vitreous hemorrhage, orbital-floor fractures, retinal hemorrhage or detachment, and rupture of the eyeball, anterior chamber 35 hemorrhage (traumatic hyphema) , burns, eyelid burns, chemical SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 22 burns, chemical burns of the cornea and conjunctiva, and ultraviolet light burns (sunburn) . See The Merck Manual, Sixteenth Edition, 217:2364-2365 (1992). The compositions and methods of the present invention 5 are also useful in treating and/or preventing the following non-limiting exemplary symptoms and complications of eye disease, eye disorder or eye injury: subconjunctival hemorrhages, vitreous hemorrhages, retinal hemorrhages, floaters, retinal detachments, photophobia, ocular pain, 10 scotomas (negative and positive), errors of refraction, emmetropia, ametropia, hyperopia (farsightedness) , myopia (nearsightedness), astigmatism, anisometropia, aniseikonia, presbyopia, bleeding, recurrent bleeding, sympathetic ophthalmia, inflammation, swelling, redness of the eye, 15 irritation of the eye, corneal ulceration and scarring, iridocyclitis, perforation of the globe, lid deformities, exophthalmos, impaired mobility of the eye, lid swelling, chemosis, loss of vision, including partial or total blindness, optic neuritis, fever, malaise, thrombophlebitis, 20 cavernous sinus thrombosis, panophthalmitis, infection of the meninges and brain, papilledema, severe cerebral symptoms (headache, decreased level of consciousness, and convulsions) , cranial nerve palsies, epiphora (chronic or persistent tearing) , copious reflux of mucus or pus, 25 follicular subconjunctival hyperplasia, corneal vascularization, cicatrization of the conjunctiva, cornea, and lids, pannus, hypopyon, lagophthalmos, phlyctenules, rubeosis iridis, bitemporal hemianopia, and homonymous hemianopia. See The Merck Manual, Sixteenth Edition, 30 217:2362-2363 (1992). The derivative may be administered in combination with an effective amount of one or more factor(s) useful in treating vision disorder, improving vision, treating memory impairment, or enhancing memory performance. 35 In a preferred embodiment, the factor(s) to be combined SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 23 with the derivative is/are selected from the group consisting of immunosuppressants for treating autoimmune, inflammatory, and immunologically-mediated disorders; wound healing agents for treating wounds resulting from injury or surgery; 5 antiglaucomatous medications for treating abnormally elevated intraocular pressure; neurotrophic factors and growth factors for treating neurodegenerative disorders or stimulating neurite outgrowth; compounds effective in limiting or preventing hemorrhage or neovascularization for treating 10 macular degeneration; and antioxidants for treating oxidative damage to eye tissues. Pharmaceutical Compositions of the Present Invention The present invention also relates to a pharmaceutical 15 composition comprising: (i) an effective amount of a derivative for treating a vision disorder, improving vision, treating memory impairment, or enhancing memory performance in an animal; and 20 (ii) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The derivative may be administered in combination with an effective amount of one or more factor(s) useful in treating vision disorders, improving vision, treating memory impairment, or enhancing memory performance. 25 Non-Immunosuppressive Neuroimmunophilin FKBP Ligands The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand used in the method and pharmaceutical composition of the present invention is a low molecular weight, small molecule 30 compound having an affinity for an FKBP-type immunophilin, such as FKBP12. When the compound binds to an FKBP-type immunophilin, it has been found to inhibit the prolyl peptidyl cis-trans isomerase activity, or rotamase, activity of the binding protein. 35 As its name suggests, the compound is devoid of any SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 24 significant immunosuppressive activity. Examples of a non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand that may be used in the inventive method and pharmaceutical composition are set forth below. 5 I. HETEROCYCLIC THIOESTERS AND KETONES FORMULA I The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula I B Az 10 N w X R2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: A and B, together with the nitrogen and carbon atoms to 15 which they are respectively attached, form a 5-7 membered saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, S, SO, SO 2 , N, NH, and NR 2 ; X is either 0 or S; 20 Z is either S, CH 2 , CHR, or CRR 3 ; W and Y are independently 0, S, CH 2 or H 2 ;
R
1 and R 3 are independently Cl-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2 -C6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is substituted with one or more 25 substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of (Arl),, Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with (Ari)n, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 25 alkyl or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with C 3 -C3 cycloalkyl, and Ar 2 ; n is 1 or 2;
R
2 is either C,-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
9 5 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C.-C, cycloalkenyl, or Ar, wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkyl, 10 C 2
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl, and hydroxy; and Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein said ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group 15 consisting of halo, hydroxyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; and wherein the heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 20 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S. Useful carbo- and heterocyclic rings include without limitation phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indenyl, azulenyl, fluorenyl, anthracenyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, 25 benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, quinolizinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, 30 benzoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isotriazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, trithianyl, indolizinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, thienyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, 35 quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 26 carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, and phenoxazinyl. FORMULA II 5 The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may also be a compound of formula II
(CH
2 )n N >Z II 00 R2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate 10 thereof, wherein: n is 1 or 2; X is 0 or S; Z is selected from the group consisting of S, CH 2 , CHR 1 , and CR 1
R
3 ; 15 R 1 and R 3 are independently selected from the group consisting of Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C straight or branched chain alkenyl, and Ar, wherein said alkyl, alkenyl or Ar 1 is unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the 20 group consisting of halo, nitro, C,-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, hydroxy, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, amino, and Ar 1 ;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C, 25 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5 -C, cycloalkenyl, and Ar; and Ar 1 is phenyl, benzyl, pyridyl, fluorenyl, thioindolyl or naphthyl, wherein said Ar 1 is unsubstituted or substituted SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 27 with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of halo, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, nitro, C 1 -C6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, 5 phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino. Preferred compounds of formula II are presented in TABLE A. TABLE A 10 No. n X Z R 1 R2 1 1 0 CH 2 3-Phenylpropyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 2 1 0 CH 2 3-(3-Pyridyl)propyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 3 1 0 CH 2 3-Phenylpropyl tert-Butyl 4 1 0 CH 2 3-(3-Pyridyl)propyl tert-Butyl 15 5 1 0 CH 2 3-(3-Pyridyl)propyl Cyclohexyl 6 1 0 CH 2 3-(3-Pyridyl)propyl Cyclopentyl 7 1 0 CH 2 3-(3-Pyridyl)propyl Cycloheptyl 8 1 0 CH 2 2-(9-Fluorenyl)ethyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 9 1 0 S 2-Phenethyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 20 10 2 0 S 2-Phenethyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 11 1 0 S Methyl(2-thioindole) 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 12 1 0 S 2-Phenethyl Cyclohexyl 13 2 0 S 2-Phenethyl tert-Butyl 14 2 0 S 2-Phenethyl Phenyl 25 15 1 0 CH 2 3-(4-Methoxyphenyl)- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl propyl 16 2 0 CH 2 4-(4-Methoxy- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl phenyl) butyl 17 2 0 CH 2 4-Phenylbutyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 18 2 0 CH 2 4-Phenylbutyl Phenyl 19 2 0 CH 2 4-Phenylbutyl Cyclohexyl 30 20 1 S CH 2 3-Phenylpropyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 21 1 S S 2-Phenethyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 28 No. n X Z Ri R2 22 2 S CH 2 3-Phenylpropyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 23 2 S S 2-Phenethyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 24 2 0 CHR 1 3-Phenylpropyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 25 2 0 CHR 1 3-Phenylpropyl Cyclohexyl 5 26 2 0 CHR 1 3-Phenylpropyl Phenyl 27 2 0 CHR 1 3-Phenylpropyl 3,4,5-Trimethoxy phenyl 28 1 0 S 2-Phenethyl Cyclopentyl 29 2 0 S 3-Phenylpropyl tert-Butyl 30 1 0 S 3-Phenylpropyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 10 31 1 0 S 3-(3-Pyridyl)propyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 32 1 0 S 3-Phenylpropyl Cyclohexyl 33 1 0 S 4-Phenylbutyl Cyclohexyl 34 1 0 S 4-Phenylbutyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 35 1 0 S 3-(3-Pyridyl)propyl Cyclohexyl 15 36 1 0 S 3,3-Diphenylpropyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 37 1 0 S 3,3-Diphenylpropyl Cyclohexyl 38 1 0 S 3-(4-Methoxyphenyl)- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl propyl 39 2 0 S 4-Phenylbutyl tert-Butyl 40 2 0 S 1,5-Diphenylpentyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 20 41 2 0 S 1,5-Diphenylpentyl Phenyl 42 2 0 S 3-(4-Methoxyphenyl)- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl propyl 43 2 0 S 3-(4-Methoxyphenyl)- Phenyl propyl 44 2 0 S 3-(1-Naphthyl)propyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 45 1 0 S 3,3-Di(4- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl fluoro)phenylpropyl 25 46 1 0 S 4,4-Di(4-fluoro)- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl phenylbutyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 29 No. n X Z R, R2 47 1 0 S 3-(1-Naphthyl)propyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 48 1 0 S 2,2-Diphenylethyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 49 2 0 S 2,2-Diphenylethyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 50 2 0 S 3,3-Diphenylpropyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 5 51 1 0 S 3-(4-{Trifluoro- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl methyl}phenyl)propyl 52 1 0 S 3-(2-Naphthyl)propyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 53 2 0 S 3-(1-Naphthyl)propyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 54 1 0 S 3-(3-Chloro)phenyl- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl propyl 55 1 0 s 3-(3-{Trifluoro- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl methyl}phenyl)propyl 10 56 1 0 S 3-(2-Biphenyl)propyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 57 1 0 S 3-(2-Fluorophenyl)- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl propyl 58 1 0 S 3-(3-Fluorophenyl)- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl propyl 59 2 0 S 4-Phenylbutyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 60 2 0 S 3-Phenylpropyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl 15 61 1 0 S 3-(2-Chloro)phenyl- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl propyl 62 2 0 S 3-(3-Chloro)- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl phenylpropyl 63 2 0 S 3-(2-Fluoro)phenyl- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl propyl 64 2 0 S 3-(3-Fluoro)- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl phenylpropyl 65 1 0 S 3-(2,5-Dimethoxy- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl phenylpropyl 20 66 1 0 CH 2 3-Phenylpropyl Cyclohexyl 67 1 0 CH 2 3-Phenylethyl tert-Butyl 68 2 0 CH 2 4-Phenylbutyl Cyclohexyl 69 2 0 CHR 1 2-Phenylethyl tert-Butyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 30 No. n X Z R 1 R2 70 1 0 CH 2 3,3-Di(4-fluoro- 1,1-Dimethylpropyl phenyl) propyl 71 2 0 CH 2 3-Phenylpropyl 1,1-Dimethylpropyl Preferred compounds of TABLE A are named as follows: 5 1 (2S)-2-({l-Oxo-5-phenyl}-pentyl-l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)pyrrolidine 2 3,3-Dimethyl-l-[(2S)-2-(5-(3-pyridyl)pentanoyl)-1 pyrrolidine]-1,2-pentanedione 3 (2S)-2-({l-Oxo-4-phenyl}-butyl-l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 10 dioxobutyl)pyrrolidine 9 2-Phenyl-1-ethyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 10 2-Phenyl-1-ethyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2 piperidinecarbothioate 15 11 (3-Thioindolyl)methyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 12 2-Phenyl-1-ethyl (2S)-1-(2-cyclohexyl-1,2-dioxoethyl)-2 pyrrolidinecarbothioate 14 2-Phenyl-1-ethyl 1-(2-phenyl-1,2-dioxoethyl)-2 20 piperidinecarbothioate 28 2-Phenyl-1-ethyl (2S)-1-(1-cyclopentyl-1,2-dioxoethyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 29 3-Phenyl-1-propyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxobutyl)-2 piperidinecarbothioate 25 30 3-Phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 31 3-(3-Pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 32 3-Phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-cyclohexyl-1,2-dioxoethyl) 30 2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 33 4-Phenyl-1-butyl (2S)-1-(2-cyclohexyl-1,2-dioxoethyl)-2 pyrrolidinecarbothioate 34 4-Phenyl-1-butyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 31 2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 35 3-(3-Pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-cyclohexyl-1,2 dioxoethyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 36 3,3-Diphenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 5 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 37 3,3-Diphenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-cyclohexyl-1,2 dioxoethyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 38 3-(para-Methoxyphenyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl 1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidine-carbothioate 10 39 4-Phenyl-1-butyl 1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylbutyl) -2 piperidinecarbothioate 40 1,5-Diphenyl-3-pentyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) 2-piperidinecarbothioate 41 1,5-Diphenyl-3-mercaptopentyl 1-(3-phenyl-1,2 15 dioxoethyl)-2-piperidinecarbothioate 42 3-(para-Methoxyphenyl)-1-propyl 1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3 dimethylpentyl)piperidine-2-carbothioate 43 3-(para-Methoxyphenyl)-1-propyl 1-(2-phenyl-1,2 dioxoethyl)piperidine-2-carbothioate 20 44 3-(1-Naphthyl)-1-propyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)piperidine-2-carbothioate 45 3,3-Di (para-fluoro)phenyl-1-propyl (2S) -1- (3,3-dimethyl 1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidine-carbothioate 46 4,4-Di(para-fluorophenyl)butyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 25 oxopentanoyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 47 3-(1-Naphthyl)propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 48 2,2-Diphenylethyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl)tetrahydro-1H-2-pyrrolidine-carbothioate 30 49 2,'2-Diphenylethyl (2S) -1- (3,3-dimethyl-2-oxopentanoyl) 2-piperidinecarbothioate 50 3,3-Diphenylpropyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-2-oxopentanoyl)-2 piperidinecarbothioate 51 3-[4-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyllpropyl (2S)-1-(3,3 35 dimethyl-2-oxopentanoyl)-2-pyrrolidine-carbothioate SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 32 52 3-(2-Naphthyl)propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 53 3-(2-Naphthyl)propyl (2R,S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl)-2-piperidinecarbothioate 5 54 3-(3-Chlorophenyl)propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl) -2 -pyrrolidinecarbothioate 55 3-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyl]propyl (2S)-1-(3,3 dimethyl-2-oxopentanoyl)-2-pyrrolidine-carbothioate 56 3-(1-Biphenyl)propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 10 oxopentanoyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 57 3-(2-Fluorophenyl)propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 58 3-(3-Fluorophenyl)propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 15 59 4-Phenylbutyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-2-oxopentanoyl)-2 piperidinecarbothioate 60 3-Phenylpropyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-2-oxopentanoyl)-2 piperidinecarbothioate 61 3-(2-Chlorophenyl)propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 20 oxopentanoyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 62 3-(2-Chlorophenyl)propyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl)-2-piperidinecarbothioate 63 3-(2-Fluorophenyl)propyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl)-2-piperidinecarbothioate 25 64 3-(3-Fluorophenyl)propyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl)-2-piperidinecarbothioate 65 3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-2 oxopentanoyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarbothioate 66 (2S)-2-({1-Oxo-4-phenyl}-butyl-1-(2-Cyclohexyl-1,2 30 dioxoethyl)pyrrolidine 67 2-({1-Oxo-4-phenyl}-butyl-1- (3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxobutyl)pyrrolidine 68 2-({1-Oxo-6-phenyl}-hexyl-1-(2-Cyclohexyl-1,2 dioxoethyl)piperidine 35 69 2-({1-Oxo-[2-(2'-phenyl}ethyl]-4-phenyl}-butyl-1-(3,3 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 33 dimethyl-1,2-dioxobutyl)piperidine 70 1-{(2S)-2-[5,5-di(4-Fluorophenyl)pentanoyll-2 pyrrolidine}-3,3-dimethyl-1,2-pentanedione 71 3,3-Dimethyl-1-[2-(4-phenylpentanoyl)piperidino]-1,2 5 pentanedione FORMULA III Furthermore, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula III B-C A z N 10 III R2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: A, B, and C are independently CH 2 , 0, S, SO, SO 2 , NH or 15
NR
2 ; X is 0 or S; Z is S, CH 2 , CHR 1 or CR 1
R
3 ;
R
1 and R 3 are independently C-C0 6 straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, 20 wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of (Arl)n, C1-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with (Arl),. C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain 25 alkyl or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with C 3 -C. cycloalkyl, and Ar 2 ; n is 1 or 2;
R
2 is either C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5 -C, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 34 cycloalkenyl or Ar, wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkyl, 5 C 2
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl, and hydroxyl; and Ari and Ar 2 are independently an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein said ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group 10 consisting of halo, hydroxyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C,-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C,-C 4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; and wherein the heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 15 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S. Preferred compounds of formula III are presented in TABLE B. 20 TABLE B No. A B C X Z R, R2 72 CH 2 S CH 2 0 S 2-phenethyl 1,1-dimethyl-propyl 73 CH 2 S CH 2 0 CH 2 3-phenyl- 1,1-dimethyl-propyl propyl 74 CH 2
CH
2 NH 0 S 2-phenethyl 1,1-dimethyl-propyl 25 75 CH 2 S CH 2 S S 2-phenethyl 1,1-dimethyl-propyl FORMULA IV Alternatively, the non-immunosuppressive 30 neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula IV SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 35 B C D A N z 1 IV R2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 5 A, B, C and D are independently CH 2 , 0, S, SO, SO 2 , NH or NR 2 ; X is 0 or S; Z is S, CH 2 , CHR 1 or CR 1
R
3 ; R, and R 3 are independently C 1 -C. straight or branched 10 chain alkyl or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of (Ari)n, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl or C,-C, straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with 15 (Ari),, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, and Ar 2 ; n is 1 or 2;
R
2 is either C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C,-C 9 20 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl or Ari, wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, Cl-C 4 straight or 25 branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl, and hydroxyl; and Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein said ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 36 more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of halo, hydroxyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C,-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, 5 benzyloxy, and amino; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; and wherein the heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S. Preferred compounds of formula IV are presented in TABLE 10 C. TABLE C No. A B C D X Z R 1
R
2 76 CH 2
CH
2 0 CH 2 0 CH 2 3-phenyl- 1,1-dimethylpropyl propyl 15 77 CH 2
CH
2 0 CH 2 0 S 2-phen- 1,1-dimethylpropyl ethyl 78 CH 2
CH
2 S CH 2 0 CH 2 3-phenyl- 1,1-dimethylpropyl propyl 79 CH 2
CH
2 S CH 2 0 S 2-phen- 1,1-dimethylpropyl ethyl FORMULA V 20 The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may further be a compound of formula V B A z V V x 's W R2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 37 thereof, wherein: V is C, N, or S; A and B, together with V and the carbon atom to which they are respectively attached, form a 5-7 membered saturated 5 or unsaturated heterocyclic ring which may contain, in addition to V, one or more heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, S, SO, SO, N, NH, and NR 4 ;
R
4 is either C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C,-C, 10 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
9 cycloakyl, C 5
-C
7 cycloalkenyl, or Ar 3 , wherein R 4 is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of halo, haloalkyl, carbonyl, carboxy, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1
-C
6 15 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, Cl-C 4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, thioalkyl, alkylthio, sulfhydryl, amino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, aminocarboxyl, and Ar 4 ; Ar 3 and Ar 4 are independently an alicyclic or aromatic, 20 mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein said heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; and
R
1 , R 2 , W, X, Y, and Z are as defined in Formula I above. 25 II. HETEROCYCLIC ESTERS AND AMIDES FORMULA VI Additionally, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula VI SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 38 B A z N xiv Y, X or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 5 A and B, together with the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are respectively attached, form a 5-7 membered saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring which may contain, in addition to the nitrogen atom, one or more heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, S, SO, 10 SO 2 , N, NH, and NR 1 ; X is 0 or S; Z is 0, NH or NR 1 ; W and Y are independently 0, S, CH 2 or H 2 ;
R
1 is C1-C, straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2 -C6 15 straight or branched chain alkenyl, which is substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of (Arl),, Cl-C6 straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2 C straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with (Ari)n, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain 20 alkyl or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, and Ar 2 ; n is 1 or 2;
R
2 is either Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain or alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5
-C
7 25 cycloalkenyl, or Ar, wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkyl, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 39
C
2
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl, and hydroxyl; and Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or 5 more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of halo, hydroxyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 10 members; and wherein the heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S. Suitable carbo- and heterocyclic rings include without limitation naphthyl, indolyl, furyl, thiazolyl, thienyl, 15 pyridyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, fluorenyl and phenyl. FORMULA VII The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may also be a compound of formula VII B-C A N 0 -R1 20 0 0 Vii 0 R2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: A., B and C are independently CH 2 , 0, S, SO, SO2, NH or 25 NRj;
R
1 is C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2
-C
5 straight or branched chain alkenyl, which is substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of (Arl)n and C 1
-C
6 straight or branched SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 40 chain alkyl or C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with (Ari)n; n is 1 or 2;
R
2 is either C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
9 5 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5
-C
7 cycloalkenyl, or Ari; and Ari is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more 10 substituent(s) independently selected from. the group consisting of halo, hydroxyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C,-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C,-C 4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 15 members; and wherein the heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S. In a preferred embodiment of the compounds of formula VII, the heterocyclic ester or amide is the Compound GPI 20 1572, of the formula N S 0 N or 0 GPI 1572 In a particularly preferred embodiment of formula VII compounds: 25 A is CH 2 ; B is CH 2 or S; C is CH 2 or NH;
R
1 is selected from the group consisting of 3 phenylpropyl and 3-(3-pyridyl)propyl; and 30 R 2 is selected from the group consisting of 1,1 dimethvlpropyl, cyclohexyl, and tert-butyl. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 41 Specific examples of this embodiment are presented in TABLE D. TABLE D 5 No. A B C R 1 R2 80 CH 2 S CH 2 3-phenylpropyl 1,1-dimethylpropyl 81 CH 2 S CH 2 3-(3-pyridyl)propyl 1,1-dimethylpropyl 82 CH 2 S CH 2 3-phenylpropyl cyclohexyl 83 CH 2 S CH 2 3-phenylpropyl tert-butyl 10 84 CH 2
CH
2 NH 3-phenylpropyl 1,1-dimethylpropyl 85 CH 2
CH
2 NH 3-phenylpropyl cyclohexyl 86 CH 2 CH2 NH 3-phenylpropyl tert-butyl FORMULA VIII 15 In a further embodiment of this invention, the non immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula VIII B C D AN
-R
1 VIII 0 0 0 R2 20 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: A, B, C and D are independently CH 2 , 0, S, SO, SO2, NH or NR1;
R
1 is Cl-C5 straight or branched chain alkyl or C2-C 25 straight or branched chain alkenyl, which is substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of (Ari)n and C1-C straight or branched chain alkyl or C2-C6 straight or branched chain alkenyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 42 substituted with (Ar)"; n is 1 or 2;
R
2 is either Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C,-C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C,-C, 5 cycloalkenyl, or Ari; and Ari is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group 10 consisting of halo, hydroxyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, Cl-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C1 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C,-C 4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; and wherein the heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 15 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S. In a particularly preferred embodiment of formula VIII compounds: A is CH 2 ; 20 B is CH 2 ; C is S, 0 or NH; D is CH 2 ; R, is selected from the group consisting of 3 phenylpropyl and (3,4,5-trimethoxy)phenylpropyl; and 25 R 2 is selected from the group consisting of 1,1 dimethylpropyl, cyclohexyl, tert-butyl, phenyl, and 3,4,5 trimethoxyphenyl. Specific examples of this embodiment are presented in TABLE E. 30 TABLE E No. A B C D R, R2 87 CH 2
CH
2 S CH 2 3-phenylpropyl 1,1-dimethylpropyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 43 No. A B C D R, R2 88 CH 2
CH
2 0 CH 2 3-phenylpropyl 1,1-dimethylpropyl 89 CH 2
CH
2 S CH 2 3-phenylpropyl cyclohexyl 90 CH 2
CH
2 0 CH 2 3-phenylpropyl cyclohexyl 91 CH 2
CH
2 S CH 2 3-phenylpropyl phenyl 5 92 CH 2
CH
2 0 CH 2 3-phenylpropyl phenyl 93 CH 2
CH
2 NH CH 2 3-phenylpropyl 1,1-dimethylpropyl 94 CH 2
CH
2 NH CH 2 3-phenylpropyl phenyl 10 FORMULA IX Additionally, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula IX B A V Z IX ', W R2 15 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: V is C, N, or S; A and B, together with V and the carbon atom to which they are respectively attached, form a 5-7 membered saturated 20 or unsaturated heterocyclic ring which may contain, in addition to V, one or more heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, S, SO, SO, N, NH, and NR; R is either C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
9 25 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
9 cycloakyl, C 5
-C
7 cycloalkenyl, or Ar, wherein R is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 44 selected from the group consisting of halo, haloalkyl, carbonyl, carboxy, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C,-C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, Cl-C 4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, 5 benzyloxy, thioalkyl, alkylthio, sulfhydryl, amino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, aminocarboxyl, and Ar; Ar 3 and Ar 4 are independently an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein said 10 heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; and
R
1 , R 2 , W, X, Y, and Z are as defined in Formula VI above. 15 III. N-OXIDES OF HETEROCYCLIC ESTERS, AMIDES, THIOESTERS AND KETONES FORMULA X The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand 20 may further be a compound of formula X B A N X-Y-Z 1)r x 0 0 W R or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 25 A and B, together with the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are respectively attached, form a 5-7 membered saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of CH, CH 2 , 0, S, SO, SO 2 , N, NH, and NR 1 ; SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 45 W is 0, S, CH 2 , or H 2 ; R is C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5 -C, cycloalkenyl, or Ar, which is optionally substituted with 5 one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Cl-C 4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, hydroxy, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, and Ar 2 ; Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of 1-napthyl, 2-napthyl, 1-indolyl, 2-indolyl, 2 10 furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl and phenyl, having one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C6 straight or branched chain 15 alkenyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; X is 0, NH, NR1, S, CH, CR 1 , or CR 1
R
3 ; Y is a direct bond, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or 20 more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5 -C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally 25 substituted with C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, hydroxy, or carbonyl oxygen; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 2 , S, SO, or SO 2 ;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 30 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and Cl-C4 bridging alkyl wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally 35 fused to an Ar group; SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 46 Z is an aromatic amine or a tertiary amine oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; said aromatic amine is selected from the group consisting of pyridyl, pyrimidyl, quinolinyl, or 5 isoquinolinyl, which is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of halo, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, Cl-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 10 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; said tertiary amine is NR 4
RR
6 , wherein R 4 , R,, and R 6 are independently selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl optionally substituted with one or more 15 substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Cl-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3 -C3 cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally 20 substituted with C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, hydroxy, or carbonyl oxygen; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR,, S, SO, or SO 2 ; Ar is selected from the group consisting of 25 pyrrolidinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazyl, pyridazyl, quinolinyl, and isoquinolinyl; and
R
1 and R 3 are independently hydrogen, C 1
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, or Y-Z. 30 FORMULA XI Moreover, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula XI SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 47 F G EN X-Y-Z 0 0 W R or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 5 E, F, G and J are independently CH 2 , 0, S, SO, SO2, NH or NR,; W is 0, S, CH 2 , or H 2 ; R is C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5
-C
7 10 cycloalkenyl, or Ari, which is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C,-C 4 alkenyl, hydroxy, C,-Ca cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, and Ari; Ar 1 is selected from the group consisting of 1-napthyl, 15 2-napthyl, 1-indolyl, 2-indolyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, and phenyl, having one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 20 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; X is 0, NH, NR 1 , S, CH, CR 1 , or CR 1
R
3 ; Y is a direct bond, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein 25 said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5
-C
7 cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said 30 alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 48 substituted with C,-C 4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, hydroxy, or carbonyl oxygen; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR, S, SO, or SO2; 5 R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and C 1
-C
4 bridging alkyl wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said 10 heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; Z is an aromatic amine or a tertiary amine oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; said aromatic amine is pyridyl, pyrimidyl, quinolinyl, 15 and isoquinolinyl, which is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of halo, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1 -C. straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 20 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; said tertiary amine is NR 4 RR,, wherein R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are independently selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is 25 optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C2-C 8 cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, 30 cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally substituted with C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, hydroxy, or carbonyl oxygen; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 1 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; 35 Ar is selected from the group consisting of SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 49 pyrrolidinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazyl, pyridazyl, quinolinyl, and isoquinolinyl; and
R
1 and R 3 are independently hydrogen, C 1
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl 5 or alkynyl, or Y-Z. FORMULA XII Furthermore, the non- immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula XII F-G E\ X-Y-Z 10 XII 0 0 R or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: E, F, and G are independently CH 2 , 0, S, SO, SO 2 , NH or 15 NR 1 ; W is 0, S, CH 2 , or H 2 ; R is C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, or Ari, which is optionally substituted with 20 one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, hydroxy, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5
-C
7 cycloalkenyl, and Ari; Ar 1 is selected from the group consisting of 1-napthyl, 2-napthyl, 1-indolyl, 2-indolyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 25 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl and phenyl, having one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 50 benzyloxy, and amino; X is 0, NH, NR 1 , S, CH, CR,, or CRR 3 ; Y is a direct bond, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein 5 said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said 10 alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally substituted with C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, hydroxy, or carbonyl oxygen; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 2 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; 15 R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and C 1
-C
4 bridging alkyl wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said 20 heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; Z is an aromatic amine or a tertiary amine oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; said aromatic amine is pyridyl, pyrimidyl, quinolinyl, 25 or isoquinolinyl, which is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of halo, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1 -C. straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C 2 -C4 30 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; said tertiary amine is NR 4 RR,, wherein R 4 , R,, and R 6 are independently selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is 35 optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 51 independently selected from the group consisting of C,-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5
-C
7 cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, 5 cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally substituted with C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, hydroxy, or carbonyl oxygen; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 1 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; 10 Ar is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazyl, pyridazyl, quinolinyl, and isoquinolinyl; and
R
1 and R 3 are independently hydrogen, C 1
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C,-C 4 straight or branched chain alkenyl 15 or alkynyl, or Y-Z. FORMULA XIII The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may also be a compound of formula XIII
(CH
2 )n x-Y-Z N 20 XIII 0 0 W R or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: n is 1, 2, or 3, forming a 5-7 member heterocyclic ring; 25 W is 0, S, CH 2 , or H 2 ; R is Cl-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, C.-C, cycloalkenyl, or Ar, which is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 52 group consisting of C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, hydroxy, C,-Cs cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, and Ar; Ar 1 is selected from the group consisting of 1-napthyl, 2-napthyl, 1-indolyl, 2-indolyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 5 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl and phenyl, having one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C,-C 4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, 10 benzyloxy, and amino; X is 0, NH, NR 1 , S, CH, CR 1 , or CR 1
R
3 ; Y is a direct bond, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or 15 more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C3C1 cycloalkyl, C--C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally 20 substituted with C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, hydroxy, or carbonyl oxygen; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 2 , S, SO, or SO 2 ;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 25 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and Cl-C 4 bridging alkyl wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally 30 fused to an Ar group; Z is an aromatic amine or a tertiary amine oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; said aromatic amine is pyridyl, pyrimidyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl, which is either unsubstituted or 35 substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 53 selected from the group consisting of halo, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, Ci-C 4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; 5 said tertiary amine is NR 4
RR
6 , wherein R 4 , R,, and R 6 are independently selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) 10 independently selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C,-C 8 cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally substituted 15 with C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C,-C 4 alkenyl, hydroxy, or carbonyl oxygen; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or Ar is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 1 , S, SO, or SO2; Ar is selected from the group consisting of 20 pyrrolidinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazyl, pyridazyl, quinolinyl, and isoquinolinyl; and R, and R 3 hydrogen, C 1
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, or Y-Z. 25 Examples of the compounds of formula XIII when W is 0 are presented in TABLE VI. TABLE VI (CH2)n X-Y-Z N 0 0 0 R SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 54 TABLE VI continued No. n X Y Z R 95 1 0 (CH 2
)
3 3-Pyridyl N-oxide 1,1-dimethylpropyl 96 1 0 (CH 2 ) 3 2-Pyridyl N-oxide 1,1-dimethylpropyl 5 97 1 0 (CH 2 ) 3 4-Pyridyl N-oxide 1,1-dimethylpropyl 98 1 0 (CH2) 3 2-Quinolyl N-oxide 1,1-dimethylpropyl 99 1 0 (CH 2
)
3 3-Quinolyl N-oxide 1,1-dimethylpropyl 100 1 0 (CH 2
)
3 4-Quinolyl N-oxide 1,1-dimethylpropyl 10 Preferred compounds of formula XIII may be selected from the group consisting of: 3-(2-Pyridyl)-l-propyl(2S)-l-(1,1-Dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, N-oxide; 3-(3-Pyridyl)-l-propyl(2S)-l-(1,1-Dimethyl-1,2 15 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, N-oxide; 3-(4-Pyridyl)-1-propyl(2S)-l-(1,1-Dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, N-oxide; 3-(2-Quinolyl)-l-propyl(2S)-1-(1,1-Dimethyl-1, 2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, N-oxide; 20 3-(3-Quinolyl)-1-propyl(2S)-l-(1,1-Dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, N-oxide; 3-(4-Quinolyl)-1-propyl(2S)-1-(1,1-Dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, N-oxide; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, and solvates 25 thereof. FORMULA XIV Additionally, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula 30 XIV SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 55 B A V X-Y-Z XIV 0 0 W R or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 5 V is C, N, or S; A and B, together with V and the carbon atom to which they are respectively attached, form a 5-7 membered saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring which may contain, in addition to V, one or more heteroatom(s) independently 10 selected from the group consisting of 0, S, SO, SO, N, NH, and NR 7 ;
R
7 is either C 1
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
9 cycloalkyl, C 5
-C
7 cycloalkenyl, or Ar, wherein R 7 is either unsubstituted or 15 substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of halo, haloalkyl, carbonyl, carboxy, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C,-C 6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C,-C 4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, 20 benzyloxy, thioalkyl, alkylthio, sulfhydryl, amino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, aminocarboxyl, and Ar 4 ; Ar 3 and Ar 4 are independently an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein said 25 heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; and R, W, X, Y, and Z are as defined in Formula X above. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 56 IV. N-LINKED UREAS AND CARBAMATES OF HETEROCYCLIC THIOESTERS The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may further be a compound of formula XV B A S gY--Z 1 5 D XV 5 R2>j X
U-
R1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: A and B, together with the nitrogen and carbon atoms to 10 which they are respectively attached, form a 5-7 membered saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring which may contain, in addition to the nitrogen atom, one or more additional heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, S, SO, SO2, N, NH, and NR 3 ; 15 X is either O or S; Y is a direct bond, Cl-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, 20 haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; 25 R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and C 1
-C
4 bridging alkyl wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 57 heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; Ar is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either 5 unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of alkylamino, amido, amino, aminoalkyl, azo, benzyloxy, C,-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 1
-C
9 alkoxy, C 2 -C, alkenyloxy, C 2
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3 -C, 10 cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, carbonyl, carboxy, cyano, diazo, ester, formanilido, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, imino, isocyano, isonitrilo, nitrilo, nitro, nitroso, phenoxy, sulfhydryl, sulfonylsulfoxy, thio, thioalkyl, thiocarbonyl, thiocyano, thioester, thioformamido, trifluoromethyl, and 15 carboxylic and heterocyclic moieties, including alicyclic and aromatic structures; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein said heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; and wherein said aromatic or 20 tertiary alkyl amine is optionally oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; Z is a direct bond, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 25 substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 30 replaced with 0, NH, NR, S, SO, or S02; C and D are independently hydrogen, Ar, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently 35 selected from the group consisting of C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, C,-C, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 58 cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is optionally substituted with C 1 -C, alkyl, C 2
-C
6 alkenyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, 5 alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, or sulfonyl; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with oxygen to form a carbonyl; or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 10 replaced with 0, NH, NR,, S, SO, or SO 2 ; W is 0 or S; and U is either 0 or N, provided that: when U is 0, then R 1 is a lone pair of electrons and R 2 is selected from the group consisting of Ar, C 3 -C, 15 cycloalkyl, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, and
C
2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Ar and C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl; and 20 when U is N, then R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Ar, C 3 C 8 cycloalkyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is substituted with one or more 25 substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Ar and C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl; or R 1 and R 2 are taken together to form a heterocyclic 5 or 6 membered ring selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, piperidine, and piperazine. 30 Useful carbo- and heterocyclic rings include without limitation phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indenyl, azulenyl, fluorenyl, anthracenyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyridyl, 35 pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 59 quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, quinolizinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isotriazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridazinyl, 5 pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, trithianyl, indolizinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, thienyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, and 10 phenoxazinyl. In a preferred embodiment of formula XV, Ar is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indolyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, furyl, 15 fluorenyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and thienyl. FORMULA XVI Moreover, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin 20 FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula XVI F G H N D XVI R2>-- U RI or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 25 E, F, G and J are independently CH 2 , 0, S, So, SO 2 , NH, or NR 3 ,; X is either 0 or S; Y is a direct bond, Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 60 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, 5 thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ;
R
3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or 10 branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and C 1
-C
4 bridging alkyl wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; 15 Ar is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of alkylamino, amido, amino, aminoalkyl, azo, benzyloxy, C 1
-C
9 20 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 1 -C, alkoxy, C 2
-C
9 alkenyloxy, C 2
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, carbonyl, carboxy, cyano, diazo, ester, formanilido, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, imino, isocyano, isonitrilo, nitrilo, nitro, nitroso, phenoxy, 25 sulfhydryl, sulfonylsulfoxy, thio, thioalkyl, thiocarbonyl, thiocyano, thioester, thioformamido, trifluoromethyl, and carboxylic and heterocyclic moieties, including alicyclic and aromatic structures; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein said heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 30 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; and wherein said aromatic or tertiary alkyl amine is optionally oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; Z is a direct bond, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain 35 alkyl, or C 2 -C6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 61 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, 5 thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO2; C and D are independently hydrogen, Ar, Cl-C6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain 10 alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is optionally 15 substituted with C1-C6 alkyl, C 2
-C
6 alkenyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, or sulfonyl; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or 20 more position(s) with oxygen to form a carbonyl; or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; W is 0 or S; and U is either 0 or N, provided that: 25 when U is 0, then R 1 is a lone pair of electrons and R 2 is selected from the group consisting of Ar, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, and
C
2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or 30 more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Ar and C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl; and when U is N, then R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Ar, C 3 C 8 cycloalkyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, 35 and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 62 said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Ar and C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl; or R, and R 2 are taken together to form a heterocyclic 5 or 6 5 membered ring selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, piperidine, and piperazine. Useful carbo- and heterocyclic rings include without limitation phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indenyl, azulenyl, 10 fluorenyl, anthracenyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, 15 quinolizinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isotriazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, trithianyl, indolizinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, thienyl, 20 tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, and phenoxazinyl. In a preferred embodiment of formula XVI, Ar is selected 25 from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and thienyl. 30 FORMULA XVII The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may also be a compound of formula XVII SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 63 F-G Es S-Y-Z N XVII R2>j X R1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 5 E, F, and G are independently CH 2 , 0, S, SO, SO, NH, and
NR
3 ; X is either 0 or S; Y is a direct bond, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein 10 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein 15 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ;
R
3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and C 1
-C
4 bridging alkyl 20 wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; Ar is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, 25 carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of alkylamino, amido, amino, aminoalkyl, azo, benzyloxy, C 1
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 1 -C, alkoxy, C 2
-C
9 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 64 alkenyloxy, C 2
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5
-C
7 cycloalkenyl, carbonyl, carboxy, cyano, diazo, ester, formanilido, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, imino, isocyano, isonitrilo, nitrilo, nitro, nitroso, phenoxy, 5 sulfhydryl, sulfonylsulfoxy, thio, thioalkyl, thiocarbonyl, thiocyano, thioester, thioformamido, trifluoromethyl, and carboxylic and heterocyclic moieties, including alicyclic and aromatic structures; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein said heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 10 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; and wherein said aromatic or tertiary alkyl amine is optionally oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; Z is a direct bond, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain 15 alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, 20 thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; C and D are independently hydrogen, Ar, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain 25 alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 3 -C. cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is optionally 30 substituted with C 1 -C6 alkyl, C 2
-C
6 alkenyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, or sulfonyl; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or 35 more position(s) with oxygen to form a carbonyl; or wherein SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 65 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; W is 0 or S; and U is either 0 or N, provided that: 5 when U is 0, then R 1 is a lone pair of electrons and R 2 is selected from the group consisting of Ar, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, Cl-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, and
C
2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or 10 more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Ar and C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl; and when U is N, then R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Ar, C 3 C 8 cycloalkyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, 15 and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Ar and C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl; or R 1 and R 2 are taken together to form a heterocyclic 5 or 6 20 membered ring selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, piperidine, and piperazine. Useful carbo- and heterocyclic rings include without limitation phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indenyl, azulenyl, 25 fluorenyl, anthracenyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, 30 quinolizinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isotriazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, trithianyl, indolizinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, thienyl, 35 tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 66 quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, and phenoxazinyl. In a preferred embodiment of formula XVII, Ar is 5 selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and thienyl. 10 FORMULA XVIII The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may further be a compound of formula XVIII
(CH
2 )n C S-Y-Z N D XVIII R2,,,U LW X 15 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: n is 1, 2 or 3; X is either 0 or S; Y is a direct bond, Cl-C 6 straight or branched chain 20 alkyl, or C 2 -C6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, 25 thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR,, S, SO, or SO 2 ;
R
3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or 30 branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and Cl-C 4 bridging alkyl wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 67 atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; Ar is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, 5 carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of alkylamino, amido, amino, aminoalkyl, azo, benzyloxy, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, Cl-C, alkoxy, C 2 -C, 10 alkenyloxy, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5
-C
7 cycloalkenyl, carbonyl, carboxy, cyano, diazo, ester, formanilido, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, imino, isocyano, isonitrilo, nitrilo, nitro, nitroso, phenoxy, sulfhydryl, sulfonylsulfoxy, thio, thioalkyl, thiocarbonyl, 15 thiocyano, thioester, thioformamido, trifluoromethyl, and carboxylic and heterocyclic moieties, including alicyclic and aromatic structures; wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein said heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group 20 consisting of 0, N, and S; and wherein said aromatic or tertiary alkyl amine is optionally oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; Z is a direct bond, C1-C. straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein 25 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein 30 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; C and D are independently hydrogen, Ar, Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 35 substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 68 selected from the group consisting of C,-C 8 cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is optionally substituted with Ci-C6 alkyl, C 2 -C6 alkenyl, hydroxy, amino, 5 halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, or sulfonyl; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with oxygen to form a carbonyl; or wherein 10 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR, S, SO, or SO2; W is 0 or S; and U is either 0 or N, provided that: when U is 0, then R 1 is a lone pair of electrons 15 and R 2 is selected from the group consisting of Ar, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 1 C straight or branched chain alkyl, and
C
2
-C
6 straight or branched chain or alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the 20 group consisting of Ar and C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl; and when U is N, then R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Ar, C 3 C 8 cycloalkyl, C 1 -C6 straight or branched chain alkyl, and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein 25 said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Ar and C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl; or R, and R 2 are taken together to form a heterocyclic 5 or 6 membered ring selected from the group consisting of 30 pyrrolidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, piperidine, and piperazine. Useful carbo- and heterocyclic rings include without limitation phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indenyl, azulenyl, fluorenyl, anthracenyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, 35 benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 69 benzthiazolyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, quinolizinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, 5 benzoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isotriazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, trithianyl, indolizinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, thienyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, 10 quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, and phenoxazinyl. In a preferred embodiment of formula XVIII, Ar is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, 15 naphthyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and thienyl. Exemplary compounds of formula XVIII are presented in TABLE VII. 20 TABLE VII
(CH
2 )n C N-I S -Y-Z R X 2 U W R1 No. n W Y Z C D R 1
R
2 101 1 0 (CH 2
)
2 CH 3-Pyridyl H H 2-Methyl butyl 25 102 1 0 (CH 2
)
2 CH 3-Pyridyl H H 1,1 dimethyl propyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 70 TABLE VII (continued) No. n W Y Z C D R 1
R
2 103 1 0 (CH 2 )2 CH 4-Methoxy- H H 1,1 phenyl dimethyl propyl 104 1 0 CH 2 CH Phenyl H H 1,1 dimethyl propyl 5 105 1 S (CH 2
)
2 CH 4-Methoxy- H H Cyclohexyl phenyl 106 1 0 (CH 2
)
2 CH 3-Pyridyl H H Cyclohexyl 107 1 S (CH 2
)
2 CH 3-Pyridyl H H Cyclohexyl 108 1 S (CH 2
)
2 CH 3-Pyridyl H H 1 Adamantyl 109 1 S (CH 2
)
2 CH 3-Pyridyl H H 1,1 dimethyl propyl 10 110 1 0 (CH 2 ) 2 CH Phenyl Phenyl H 1,1 dimethyl propyl 111 2 0 (CH 2 ) 2 CH Phenyl H H 1,1 dimethyl propyl 112 2 0 (CH 2 ) 2 CH Phenyl H H Phenyl 113 2 0 Direct CH 2-Phenyl- 2- H Phenyl bond ethyl Phenyl ethyl 114 2 0 Direct CH 2-Phenyl- 2- H Cyclohexyl bond ethyl Phenyl ethyl 15 115 2 S Direct CH 2-Phenyl- 2- H Cyclohexyl bond ethyl Phenyl ethyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 71 TABLE VII (continued) No. n W Y Z C D R 1
R
2 116 2 0 (CH 2 ) 2 CH 4-Methoxy- H H Cyclohexyl phenyl The most preferred compounds of formula XVIII are selected from the group consisting of: 5 3-(3-Pyridyl)-l-propyl-2S-1-[(2-methylbutyl) carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate; 3-(3-Pyridyl)-l-propyl-2S-1-[(1',1'-Dimethylpropyl) carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate; 3-(3-Pyridyl)-l-propyl-2S-1-[(cyclohexyl) 10 thiocarbamoyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, and solvates thereof. FORMULA XIX 15 Additionally, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula XIX B A A S-Y-Z D xix x R1 20 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: V is C, N, or S; Y is a direct bond, CI-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein 25 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 72 substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein 5 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ;
R
3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Cj
C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and Cl-C 4 bridging alkyl 10 wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; Ar is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, 15 carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent (s); wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein said heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; and 20 wherein said aromatic or tertiary alkyl amine is optionally oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; Z is a direct bond, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 25 substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 30 replaced with 0, NH, NR3, S, SO, or SO2; C and D are independently hydrogen, Ar, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently 35 selected from the group consisting of C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, C 5 -C, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 73 cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is optionally substituted with C 1
-C
6 alkyl, C 2 -C, alkenyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, 5 alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, or sulfonyl; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with oxygen to form a carbonyl; or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 10 replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO2; and A, B, Rl, R 2 , U, W, and X are as otherwise defined in formula XV. V. N-LINKED SULFONAMIDES OF HETEROCYCLIC THIOESTERS 15 FORMULA XX The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may further be a compound of formula XX B C AN S-Y-Z N 1 Y D XX O=S X 0 Ri 20 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: A and B, together with the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are respectively attached, form a 5-7 membered saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring which may contain, 25 in addition to the nitrogen atom, one or more heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, S, SO, SO2, N, NH, and NR 2 ; X is either 0 or S; Y is a direct bond, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 74 alkyl, or C 2 -C6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, 5 cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR,, S, SO, or SO2;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C, 10 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C,-C 4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and Cl-C 4 bridging alkyl wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally 15 fused to an Ar group; Ar is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent (s); wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein the 20 heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; wherein an aromatic or tertiary alkyl amine is optionally oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; Z is a direct bond, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain 25 alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, 30 thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 2 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; C and D are independently hydrogen, Ar, C1-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain 35 alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 75 substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 3 -C3 cycloalkyl, C 5 -C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is optionally 5 substituted with Cl-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C6 alkenyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, or sulfonyl; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or 10 more position(s) with oxygen to form a carbonyl; or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; and
R
1 is selected from the group consisting of Ar, C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, and C 2
-C
6 15 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Ar, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, amino, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, Cl-C, straight or branched chain 20 alkyl, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, and sulfonyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 25 Useful carbo- and heterocyclic rings include without limitation phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indenyl, azulenyl, fluorenyl, anthracenyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyridyl, 30 pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, quinolizinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isotriazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridazinyl, 35 pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, trithianyl, indolizinyl, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 76 pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, thienyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, and 5 phenoxazinyl. In a preferred embodiment of formula XX, Ar is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indolyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, furyl, 10 fluorenyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and thienyl. In another preferred embodiment of formula XX, A and B, together with the nitrogen and carbon atoms to which they are respectfully attached, form a 6 membered saturated or 15 unsaturated heterocyclic ring; and R 2 is C 4 -C, branched chain alkyl, C,-C, cycloalkyl, phenyl, or 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl. In the most preferred embodiment of formula XX, the compound is selected from the group consisting of: 3-(para-Methoxyphenyl)-1-propylmercaptyl(2S)-N 20 (benzenesulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate; 3-(para-Methoxyphenyl)-1-propylmercaptyl(2S)-N-(a toluenesulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate; 3-(para-Methoxyphenyl)-1-propylmercaptyl(2S)-N-(ai toluenesulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate; 25 1,5-Diphenyl-3-pentylmercaptyl N-(para toluenesulfonyl)pipecolate; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, and solvates thereof. 30 FORMULA XXI Moreover, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula XXI SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 77 F J C E 1 S-Y-Z IX Ri or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 5 E, F, G and J are independently CH 2 , 0, S, SO, SO 2 , NH or NR 2 ; X is either 0 or S; Y is a direct bond, C 1 -C6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein 10 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein 15 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and Cl-C 4 bridging alkyl 20 wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; Z is a direct bond, C 1 -C6 straight or branched chain 25 alkyl, or C 2 -C6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 78 thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 2 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; Ar is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, 5 carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent (s); wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein the heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; wherein an 10 aromatic or tertiary alkyl amine is optionally oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; C and D are independently hydrogen, Ar, C 1 -C6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 15 substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, C-C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is optionally substituted with C 1
-C
6 alkyl, C 2 -C, alkenyl, hydroxy, amino, 20 halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, or sulfonyl; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with oxygen to form a carbonyl; or wherein 25 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 ; and
R
1 is selected from the group consisting of Ar, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or 30 alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Ar, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, amino, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C,-C 6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, carbonyl, 35 thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 79 nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, and sulfonyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 . Useful carbo- and heterocyclic rings include without 5 limitation phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indenyl, azulenyl, fluorenyl, anthracenyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, 10 quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, quinolizinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isotriazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, trithianyl, indolizinyl, 15 pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, thienyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, and phenoxazinyl. 20 In a preferred embodiment of formula XXI, Ar is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indolyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, furyl, fluorenyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, 25 pyrazolyl, and thienyl. FORMULA XXII The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may also be a compound of formula XXII SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 80 /FG C Es S-Y-Z N XXII Dxx1 00 R1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 5 E, F, and G are independently CH 2 , 0, S, SO, SO 2 , NH or
NR
2 ; X is either 0 or S; Y is a direct bond, Cl-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2 -C6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein 10 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein 15 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 2 , S, SO, or SO 2 ;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and Cl-C 4 bridging alkyl 20 wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; Ar is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, 25 carbo-- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent (s); wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein the heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; wherein an 30 aromatic or tertiary alkyl amine is optionally oxidized to a SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 81 corresponding N-oxide; Z is a direct bond, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 5 substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 10 0, NH, NR 2 , S, SO, or SO 2 ;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C3-C4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and Cl-C 4 bridging alkyl wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon 15 atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; C and D are independently hydrogen, Ar, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C2-C6 straight or branched chain 20 alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C.-C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is optionally 25 substituted with C1-C4 alkyl, C2-C4 alkenyl, or hydroxy; wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 2 , S, SO, or 30 SO 2 ; and
R
1 is selected from the group consisting of Ar, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 straight or branched chain alkyl, and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more 35 substituent(s) independently selected from the group SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 82 consisting of Ar, C 3 -Cs cycloalkyl, amino, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, 5 nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, and sulfonyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR, S, SO, or SO2 Useful carbo- and heterocyclic rings include without limitation phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indenyl, azulenyl, 10 fluorenyl, anthracenyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, 15 quinolizinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isotriazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, trithianyl, indolizinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, thienyl, 20 tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, and phenoxazinyl. In a preferred embodiment of formula XXII, Ar is 25 selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indolyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, furyl, fluorenyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and thienyl. 30 FORMULA XXIII Additionally, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula XXIII SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 83
(CH
2 )n C N S-Y-ZD XI N xxm~Z R1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 5 n is 1, 2 or 3; X is either 0 or S; Y is a direct bond, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2 -C6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 10 substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 15 replaced with 0, NH, NR2, S, SO, or SO2;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 3
-C
4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and C 1
-C
4 bridging alkyl wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon 20 atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; Z is a direct bond, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein 25 any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with amino, halo, haloalkyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, sulfonyl, or oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein 30 any atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 84 0, NH, NR 2 , S, SO, or SO 2 ;
R
2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 C 4 straight or branched chain alkyl, C,-C 4 straight or branched chain alkenyl or alkynyl, and C,-C 4 bridging alkyl 5 wherein a bridge is formed between the nitrogen and a carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl chain containing said heteroatom to form a ring, wherein said ring is optionally fused to an Ar group; Ar is an alicyclic or aromatic, mono-, bi- or tricyclic, 10 carbo- or heterocyclic ring, wherein the ring is either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent (s); wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein the heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; wherein an 15 aromatic or tertiary alkyl amine is optionally oxidized to a corresponding N-oxide; C and D are independently hydrogen, Ar, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally 20 substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, C 5
-C
7 cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, carbonyl oxygen, and Ar; wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl is optionally substituted with C 1
-C
4 alkyl, C 2
-C
4 alkenyl, or hydroxy; 25 wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted in one or more position(s) with oxygen to form a carbonyl, or wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 2 , S, SO, or
SO
2 ; and 30 R 1 is selected from the group consisting of Ar, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group 35 consisting of Ar, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, amino, halo, haloalkyl, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 85 hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, ester, thioester, alkoxy, alkenoxy, cyano, nitro, imino, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, sulfhydryl, thioalkyl, 5 and sulfonyl, wherein any carbon atom of said alkyl or alkenyl is optionally replaced with 0, NH, NR 3 , S, SO, or SO 2 . Useful carbo- and heterocyclic rings include without limitation phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, indenyl, azulenyl, fluorenyl, anthracenyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, 10 benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, quinolizinyl, furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, 15 benzoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isotriazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, trithianyl, indolizinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, thienyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, 20 quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, and phenoxazinyl. In a preferred embodiment of formula XXIII, Ar is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, 25 naphthyl, indolyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, furyl, fluorenyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and thienyl. Exemplary compounds of formula XXIII are presented in 30 TABLE VIII. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 86 TABLE VIII
CH
2 )n C S-Y-Z N D o=so 0 01-0 No. n Y z C D R1 5 117 1 CH 2 CH Phenyl H Phenyl 118 1 CH 2 CH Phenyl H a-Methyl phenyl 119 1 CH 2 CH Phenyl H 4 Methylphenyl 120 1 (CH 2 ) 2 CH p-Methoxy- H Phenyl phenyl 121 1 (CH 2 ) 2 CH p-Methoxy- H a-Methyl phenyl phenyl 10 122 1 (CH 2 ) 2 CH p-Methoxy- H 4-Methyl phenyl phenyl 123 1 (CH 2 ) 2 CH Phenyl Phenyl Phenyl 124 1 (CH 2 ) 2 CH Phenyl Phenyl a -Methyl phenyl 125 1 (CH 2 ) 2 CH Phenyl Phenyl 4-Methyl phenyl 126 2 (CH 2 ) 3 CH Phenyl H Phenyl 15 127 2 (CH 2 ) 3 CH Phenyl H a--Methyl phenyl 128 2 (CH 2
)
3 CH Phenyl H 4-Methyl phenyl 129 2 (CH 2
)
3 CH Phenyl H 3,4,5-tri methoxyphenyl 130 2 (CH 2 ) 3 CH Phenyl H Cyclohexyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 87 TABLE VIII (continued)
CH
2 )n C S-Y-Z N D o=so 0 No. n Y Z C D R1 131 2 Direct CH 3-Phenyl- 3-Phenyl- Phenyl bond propyl propyl 5 132 2 Direct CH 3-Phenyl- 3-Phenyl- a-Methyl bond propyl propyl phenyl 133 2 Direct CH 3-Phenyl- 3-Phenyl- 4-Methyl bond propyl propyl phenyl 134 2 Direct CH 3-Phenyl- 3-Phenyl- 4-Methyl bond ethyl ethyl phenyl 135 2 Direct CH 3-(4- 3-Phenyl- 4-Methyl bond Methoxy- propyl phenyl phenyl) propyl 136 2 Direct CH 3-(2- 3-Phenyl- 4-Methyl bond Pyridyl)- propyl phenyl propyl 10 The most preferred compounds of formula XXIII are selected from the group consisting of: 3- (para-Methoxyphenyl)-1-propylmercaptyl(2S)-N (benzenesulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate; 15 3- (para-Methoxyphenyl)-1-propylmercaptyl(2S)-N- (a toluenesulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate; 3-(para-Methoxyphenyl)-1-propylmercaptyl(2S)-N-(a toluenesulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate; 1,5-Diphenyl-3-pentylmercaptyl N-(para 20 toluenesulfonyl)pipecolate; and SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 88 pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, and solvates thereof. FORMULA XXIV 5 Moreover, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula XXIV B C A S-Y-Z 1D XXIV O -- S X 10 Ri or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate 10 thereof, wherein: V is C, N, or S; A, B, C, D, R 1 , X, Y, and Z are as defined in formula XX above. 15 VI. PYRROLIDINE DERIVATIVES FORMULA XXV The non-immunosupressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may also be a compound of formula XXV Y-Z N 0 XXV 0 x R, 20 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein:
R
1 is Cj-C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5 -C, 25 cycloalkenyl or Ari, wherein said R 1 is unsubstituted or SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 89 substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Cl-C6 alkyl, C 2 -C6 alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C 5 -C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, and Ar 2 ; 5 Ari and Ar 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of 1-naphthyl, 2-napthyl, 2-indolyl, 3-indolyl, 2 furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl and phenyl, wherein said Ar 1 is unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently 10 selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; X is 0, S, CH 2 or H 2 ; 15 Y is a direct bond, 0, or NR 2 , wherein R 2 is hydrogen or Cl-C 6 alkyl; and Z is C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said Z is substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently 20 selected from the group consisting of Arl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, and C1-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with C,-Cs cycloalkyl; or Z is fragment 0 -CH X2 - R3 25 wherein:
R
3 is Cl-C 9 straight or branched chain alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl or Ar;
X
2 is 0 or NR, wherein R, is selected from the group 30 consisting of hydrogen, C 1 -C6 straight or branched chain alkyl, and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; and SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 90
R
4 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
5 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C,-C, straight or branched chain alkyl substituted with phenyl, and C 2 -C, straight or branched 5 chain alkenyl substituted with phenyl. In a preferred embodiment of formula XXV, Z and R 1 are lipophilic. In a more preferred embodiment of formula XXV, the compound is selected from the group consisting of: 10 3-phenyl-l-propyl (2S)-l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-phenyl-1-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3 15 dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl)-1-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-l (3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(4,5-dichlorophenyl)-1-propyl (2S)-l-(3,3-dimethyl 1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 20 3-(4,5-dichlorophenyl)-1-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-1-(3,3 dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(4,5-methylenedioxyphenyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3 dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(4,5-methylenedioxyphenyl)-1-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-1 25 (3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-cyclohexyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-cyclohexyl-l-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 30 (iR)-1,3-diphenyl-l-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; (1R)-1,3-diphenyl-l-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-1-(3,3 dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; (lR)-l-cyclohexyl-3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-l-(3,3 35 dimethvl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 91 (lR)-1-cyclohexyl-3-phenyl-l-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-1 (3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; (lR)-l-(4,5-dichlorophenyl)-3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1 (3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 5 3-phenyl-l-propyl (2S) -1- (1,2-dioxo-2-cyclohexyl)ethyl 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-4-cyclohexyl)butyl 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S) -1- (1,2-dioxo-2- [2-furanyl] )ethyl 10 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-phenyl-l-propyl (2S) -1- (1,2-dioxo-2-[2-thienyl])ethyl 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-2-[2 thiazolyl])ethyl-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 15 3-phenyl-l-propyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-2-phenyl)ethyl-2 pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 1,7-diphenyl-4-heptyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-phenyl-l-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxo-4 20 hydroxybutyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-phenyl-l-propyl (2S) -1- (3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarboxamide; 1-[l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-L-prolinel-L phenylalanine ethyl ester; 25 1- [1- (3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) -L-proline] -L-leucine ethyl ester; 1-[l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-L-proline]-L phenylglycine ethyl ester; 1-[1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-L-proline]-L 30 phenylalanine phenyl ester; 1-[l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-L-proline]-L phenylalanine benzyl ester; 1-[l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-L-proline]-L isoleucine ethyl ester; and 35 pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, and solvates SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 92 thereof. FORMULA XXVI Additionally, the non-immunosuppressive 5 neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula XXVI O-Z N I0 0
R
1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate 10 thereof, wherein:
R
1 is C 1
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, C,-C, cycloalkenyl or Ari, wherein said R 1 is unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently 15 selected from the group consisting of C1-C, alkyl, C 2 -C, alkenyl, C 3 -C. cycloalkyl, C 5 -C, cycloalkenyl, hydroxy, and Ar 2 ; Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of 1-naphthyl, 2-napthyl, 2-indolyl, 3-indolyl, 2 20 furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl and phenyl, wherein said Ar 1 is unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched 25 chain alkyl, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
4 alkoxy, C 2
-C
4 alkenyloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, and amino; Z is C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said Z is substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently 30 selected from the group consisting of Arl, C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl, and C,-C, straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2
-C
6 straight SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 93 or branched chain alkenyl substituted with C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl; or Z is fragment 0 -CH X-R4 R3 5 wherein:
R
3 is C 1
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl or Ar;
X
2 is 0 or NR 5 , wherein R, is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain 10 alkyl, and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; and
R
4 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, C 1
-C
5 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
5 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 1
-C
5 straight or branched chain alkyl substituted with phenyl, and C 2
-C
5 straight or branched 15 chain alkenyl substituted with phenyl. In a preferred embodiment of formula XXVI, R 1 is selected from the group consisting of C 1
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkyl, 2-cyclohexyl, 4-cyclohexyl, 2-furanyl, 2-thienyl, 2-thiazolyl, and 4-hydroxybutyl. 20 In another preferred embodiment of formula XXVI, Z and
R
1 are lipophilic. FORMULA XXVII The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand 25 may also be a compound of formula XXVII SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 94 H N-Z' oO XXVII 0 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: 5 Z' is fragment 0 -CIH X2 R3 wherein:
R
3 is C 1
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkyl or 10 unsubstituted Ari, wherein said alkyl is unsubstituted or substituted with C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl or Ari;
X
2 is 0 or NR 5 , wherein R 5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, and C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl; 15 R 4 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2
-C
5 straight or branched chain alkenyl, C1-C 5 straight or branched chain alkyl substituted with phenyl, and C 2
-C
5 straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with phenyl; and 20 Ari is as defined in formula XXVI. In a preferred embodiment of formula XXVII, Z' is lipophilic. FORMULA XXVIII 25 The non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 95 may also be a compound of formula XXVIII Y-Z N 0 XXVIII 0 X
R
1 wherein: 5 R, is Cl-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl, C,-C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, C 3
-C
6 cycloalkyl or Ar, wherein said alkyl or alkenyl is unsubstituted or substituted with C 3
-C
6 cycloalkyl or Ar 2 ; Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently selected from the group 10 consisting of 2-furyl, 2-thienyl, and phenyl; X is 0, S, CH 2 or H 2 ; Y is oxygen; Z is C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said Z is 15 substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of 2-furyl, 2-thienyl, C 3 C, cycloalkyl, pyridyl, and phenyl, each having one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and C 1
-C
4 alkoxy. 20 In a preferred embodiment of formula XXVIII, Z and R 1 are lipophilic. In another preferred embodiment of formula XXVIII, the compound is selected from the group consisting of: 3-(2,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl 25 1,2-dioxopentyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(2,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-1-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-1-(3,3 dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 2- (3, 4, 5-trimethoxyphenyl) -1-ethyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl 1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 30 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 96 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(2-pyridyl)-l-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(4-pyridyl)-l-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 5 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-tert-butyl-1,2-dioxoethyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-cyclohexylethyl-1,2 dioxoethyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 10 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-l-(2-cyclohexylethyl-1,2 dioxoethyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-tert-butyl-1,2 dioxoethyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3,3-diphenyl-l-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 15 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(3-pyridyl)-l-propyl (2S)-1-(2-cyclohexyl-1,2 dioxoethyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-N-([2-thienyl] glyoxyl)pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 20 3,3-diphenyl-l-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxobutyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3,3-diphenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-cyclohexylglyoxyl 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3,3-diphenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-thienyl)glyoxyl 25 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, and solvates thereof. In a more preferred embodiment of formula XXVIII, the compound is selected from the group consisting of: 30 3'-(3-pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(2-pyridyl)-l-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; 3-(3-pyridyl)-l-propyl (2S)-1-(2-cyclohexyl-1,2 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 97 dioxoethyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, and solvates thereof. In the most preferred embodiment of formula XXVIII, the 5 compound is 3- (3-pyridyl) -1-propyl (2S) -1- (3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, and solvates thereof. FORMULA XXIX 10 Additionally, the non-immunosuppressive neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand may be a compound of formula XXIX B As Y-Z V XXIX 0 0 x R1 15 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or solvate thereof, wherein: unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituent (s) wherein the individual ring size is 5-8 members; wherein said heterocyclic ring contains 1-6 heteroatom(s) independently 20 selected from the group consisting of 0, N, and S; X is 0, S, CH 2 or H 2 ; Y is a direct bond, 0, or NR 2 , wherein R 2 is hydrogen or Cl-C, alkyl; and Z is C 1
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkyl, or C 2
-C
6 25 straight or branched chain alkenyl, wherein said Z is substituted with one or more substituent(s) independently selected from the group consisting of Arl, C 3 -C, cycloalkyl, and Cl-C 6 straight or branched chain alkyl or C 2 -C6 straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with C 3 -C, cycloalkyl; SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 98 or Z is fragment 0 -CH
X
2 R R3 wherein: 5 R 3 is C 1
-C
9 straight or branched chain alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with C 3
-C
8 cycloalkyl or Ari;
X
2 is 0 or NR,, wherein R, is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 -C, straight or branched chain alkyl, and C 2
-C
6 straight or branched chain alkenyl; and 10 R 4 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, benzyl, C 1
-C
5 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl, Cl-C. straight or branched chain alkyl substituted with phenyl, and C 2 -C, straight or branched chain alkenyl substituted with phenyl. 15 All the compounds of Formulas I-XXIX possess asymmetric centers and thus can be produced as mixtures of stereoisomers or as individual R- and S- stereoisomers. The individual stereoisomers may be obtained by using an optically active starting material, by resolving a racemic or non-racemic 20 mixture of an intermediate at some appropriate stage of the synthesis, or by resolving the compounds of Formulas I-XXIX. It is understood that the compounds of Formulas I-XXIX encompass individual stereoisomers as well as mixtures (racemic and non-racemic) of stereoisomers. Preferably, S 25 stereoisomers are used in the pharmaceutical compositions and methods of the present invention. Synthesis of Non-Immunosuppressive Neuroimmunophilin FKBP licrands 30 The compounds of formulas XV to XIX may be readily nrenared by standard techniques of organic chemistry, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 99 utilizing the general synthetic pathway depicted below. As described by Scheme I, cyclic amino acids 1 protected by suitable blocking groups P on the amino acid nitrogen may be reacted with thiols RSH to generate thioesters 2. After 5 removal of the protecting group, the free amine 3 may be reacted with a variety of isocyanates or isothiocyanates to provide the final ureas or thioureas, respectively. SCHEME I 10
(CH
2 )n
(CH
2 )n OH R-SH 0 'N S-R Deprotect N Coupling O Method P 0 1 2 (CH2)n R'-N=C=W (CH2)n 4f S-R 1 S-R N CH 2 Cl 2 N H O O 3 HN W R' 5 Isocyanates (R'NCO) or isothiocyanates (R'NCS) 4 may be conveniently prepared from the corresponding readily available amines by reaction with phosgene or thiophosgene, 15 as depicted in Scheme II. SCHEME II W
R'-NH
2 + ClRCl ' R-NCW 20 Thiols R-SH may be conveniently prepared from the corresponding readily available alcohols or halides via a two step replacement of halide by sulfur, as described in Scheme III. Halides may be reacted with thiourea, and the corresponding alkyl thiouronium salts hydrolyzed to provide SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 100 thiols RSH. If alcohols are used as the starting materials, they may be first converted to the corresponding halides by standard methods. 5 SCHEME III 1) PBr 3 H 2 N NH 2 R-OH or R-Br R-SE CBr 4 /Ph 3 P 2) OH~ The compounds of formulas XX to XXIV may be readily prepared by standard techniques of organic chemistry, 10 utilizing the general synthetic pathway depicted below. As described by Scheme IV, cyclic amino acids 1 protected by suitable blocking groups P on the amino acid nitrogen may be reacted with thiols RSH to generate thioesters 2. After removal of the protecting group, the free amine 3 may be 15 reacted with various sulfonyl chlorides 4 to provide final products 5 in good to excellent yield. SCHEME IV (CH2)n (CH2)n $C ,rOH R-SH 0. $)n S-R Deprotect N Coupling N Method I P P 1 2 C1 O= =O
(CH
2 )n
(CH
2 )n ' 4 S-R K S-Rk N N Et 3 N, CH 2 Cl 2 H 3 5 20 Thiols R-SH may be conveniently prepared from the corresponding readily available alcohols or halides via a two SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 101 step replacement of halogen by sulfur, as described in Scheme V. Halides may be reacted with thiourea, and the corresponding alkyl thiouronium salts hydrolyzed to provide thiols RSH. If alcohols are used as the starting materials, 5 they may be first converted to the corresponding halides by standard methods. SCHEME V 1) S PBr 3 or H 2 N NH 2 R-OH R-Br R-SH CBr 4 /Ph 3 P 2) OH~ 10 The compounds of formulas XXV to XXIX may be prepared by a variety of synthetic sequences that utilize established chemical transformations. The general pathway to the present compounds is described in Scheme VI. N-glyoxylproline 15 derivatives may be prepared by reacting L-proline methyl ester with methyl oxalyl chloride as shown in Scheme VI. The resulting oxamates may be reacted with a variety of carbon nucleophiles to obtain intermediates compounds. These intermediates are then reacted with a variety of alcohols, 20 amides, or protected amino acid residues to obtain the propyl esters and amides of the invention. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 102 SCHEME VI 0 C 0 POCH 3
OCH
3 O
OCH
3 RLi or RMgX N N Ho 0
OCH
3
OCH
3 LiOH OH N O MeOH/H 2 0 N Coupling O 0 0 M ethod O 4z 0
OCH
3 OCH 3 Y-Z N O 0 R The substituted alcohols may be prepared by a number of 5 methods known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis. As described in Scheme VII, alkyl or aryl aldehydes may be homologated to phenyl propanols by reaction with methyl (triphenyl-phosphoranylidene) acetate to provide a variety of trans-cinnamates; these latter may be reduced to 10 the saturated alcohols by reaction with excess lithium aluminum hydride, or sequentially by reduction of the double bond by catalytic hydrogenation and reduction of the saturated ester by appropriate reducing agents. Alternatively, the trans-cinnamates may be reduced to (E) 15 allylic alcohols by the use of diisobutylaluminum hydride. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 103 SCHEME VII Lithium alumnum Ph 3
P=CHCOOCH
3 hydride R-CHO R C R OH THF Diisobutylaluminum H2, Lithium aluminum Pd/C hydride or hydride PDiisobutylaluminum hydride R OH RCOOCH3 Longer chain alcohols may be prepared by homologation of 5 benzylic and higher aldehydes. Alternatively, these aldehydes may be prepared by conversion of the corresponding phenylacetic and higher acids, and phenethyl and higher alcohols. 10 Affinity for FKBP12 The compounds used in the inventive methods and pharmaceutical compositions have an affinity for the FK506 binding protein, particularly FKBP12. The inhibition of the prolyl peptidyl cis-trans isomerase activity of FKBP may be 15 measured as an indicator of this affinity. Ki Test Procedure Inhibition of the peptidyl-prolyl isomerase (rotamase) activity of the compounds used in the inventive methods and 20 pharmaceutical compositions can be evaluated by known methods described in the literature (Harding et al., Nature, 1989, 341:758-760; Holt et al. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 115:9923-9938). These values are obtained as apparent Ki's. The cis-trans isomerization of an alanine-proline bond 25 in a model substrate, N-succinyl-Ala-Ala-Pro-Phe-p nitroanilide, is monitored spectrophotometrically in a chymotrypsin-coupled assay, which releases para-nitroanilide from the trans form of the substrate. The inhibition of this reaction caused by the addition of different concentrations SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 104 of inhibitor is determined, and the data is analyzed as a change in first-order rate constant as a function of inhibitor concentration to yield the apparent Ki values. In a plastic cuvette are added 950 mL of ice cold assay 5 buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.8, 100 mM NaCl), 10 mL of FKBP (2.5 mM in 10 mM Tris-Cl pH 7.5, 100 mM NaCl, 1 mM dithiothreitol) , 25 mL of chymotrypsin (50 mg/ml in 1 mM HCl) and 10 mL of test compound at various concentrations in dimethyl sulfoxide. The reaction is initiated by the 10 addition of 5 mL of substrate (succinyl-Ala-Phe-Pro-Phe-para nitroanilide, 5 mg/mL in 2.35 mM LiCl in trifluoroethanol). The absorbance at 390 nm versus time is monitored for 90 seconds using a spectrophotometer and the rate constants are determined from the absorbance versus time data files. 15 TABLE IX .Tn Vitro Test Results - Formulas I to V Compound .i (nM) 1 31 20 2 210 3 85 9 104 10 12 11 299 25 12 442 14 313 28 108 29 59 30 11 30 31 8.7 32 362 33 1698 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 105 TABLE IX (continued) Compound K (nM) 34 34 35 62 5 36 7 37 68 38 8.9 39 347 40 1226 10 41 366 42 28 43 259 44 188 45 31 15 46 757 47 21 48 127 49 1334 50 55 20 51 33 52 6 53 261 54 37 55 30 25 56 880 57 57 58 79 59 962 60 90 30 61 139 62 196 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 106 TABLE IX (continued) Compound Ki (nM) 63 82 64 163 65 68 66 306 5 67 177 68 284 69 49 70 457 71 788 10 TABLE X In Vitro Test Results - Formulas VI to IX Compound K, (nM) 80 215 15 81 638 Table XI In Vitro Test Results - Formulas X to XIV Compound Ki (nM) 20 Parent (unoxidized) 7.5 compound of Example 6 95 (Example 6) 225 25 TABLE XII In Vitro Test Results - Formulas XV to XIX Compound Ki (nM) 101 +++ 102 ++ 30 103 ++ SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 107 TABLE XII (continued) Compound K. (nM) 104 ++ 105 ++ 5 106 + 107 ++ 108 +++ 109 +++ 110 +++ 10 111 ++ 112 +++ 113 +++ 114 +++ 115 +++ 15 116 ++ Relative potencies of compounds are ranked according to the following scale: ++++ denotes Ki or ED50 < 1 nM; +++ denotes Ki or ED50 of 1-50 nM; ++ denotes Ki or ED 50 of 51 20 200 nM; + denotes Ki or ED of 201-500 nM. TABLE XIII In Vitro Test Results - Formulas XX to XXIV Compound Ki (nM) 25 117 +++ 118 ++ 119 ++ 120 ++ 121 ++ 30 122 + 123 ++ SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 108 TABLE XIII (continued) Compound K. (nM) 124 +++ 125 +++ 5 126 +++ 127 ++ 128 +++ 129 +++ 130 +++ 10 131 +++ 132 ++ Relative potencies of compounds are ranked according to the following scale: ++++ denotes Ki or ED5O < 1 nM; +++ 15 denotes K, or ED50 of 1-50 nM; ++ denotes Ki or ED 50 of 51 200 nM; + denotes Ki or ED of 201-500 nM. TABLE XIV In Vitro Test Results - Formulas XXV to XXIX 20 o-Z N 0 0 No. Z R' Ki 137 1,1-dimethylpropyl 3-phenylpropyl 42 138 3-phenyl-prop-2- (E) - 125 enyl 25 139 " 3-(3,4,5-trimethoxy- 200 phenyl) propyl 140 3-(3,4,5-trimethoxy- 65 phenyl) -prop-2- (E) -enyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 109 TABLE XIV (continued) No. Z R' Ki 141 3- (4,5-methylenedioxy) - 170 phenylpropyl 142 3- (4,5-methylenedioxy) - 160 phenylprop-2-(E)-enyl 5 143 " 3-cyclohexylpropyl 200 144 3-cyclohexylprop-2-(E)- 600 enyl 145 " (1R)-1,3-diphenyl-1- 52 propyl 146 2-furanyl 3-phenylpropyl 4000 147 2-thienyl " 92 10 148 2-thiazolyl 100 149 phenyl 1970 150 1,1-dimethylpropyl 3-(2,5-dimethoxy)- 250 phenylpropyl 151 3-(2,5-dimethoxy)- 450 phenylprop-2-(E)-enyl 152 2-(3,4,5-trimethoxy- 120 phenyl) ethyl 15 153 " 3- (3-pyridyl)propyl 5 154 " 3- (2-pyridyl)propyl 195 155 " 3-(4-pyridyl)propyl 23 156 cyclohexyl 3-phenylpropyl 82 157 tert-butyl " 95 20 158 cyclohexylethyl 1025 159 cyclohexylethyl 3-(3-pyridyl)propyl 1400 160 tert-butyl 3-(3-pyridyl)propyl 3 161 1,1-dimethylpropyl 3,3-diphenylpropyl 5 162 cyclohexyl 3-(3-pyridyl)propyl 9 25 163 2-thienyl 3-(3-pyridyl)propyl 1000 164 tert-butyl 3,3-diphenylpropyl 5 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 110 TABLE XIV (continued) No. Z R' Ki 165 cyclohexyl " 20 166 2-thienyl " 150 5 Route of Administration To effectively treat vision loss or promote vision regeneration, the compounds used in the inventive methods and pharmaceutical compositions must readily affect the targeted areas. 10 Other routes of administration known in the pharmaceutical art are also contemplated by this invention. Dosage Dosage levels on the order of about 0.1 mg to about 15 10,000 mg of the active ingredient compound are useful in the treatment of the above conditions, with preferred levels of about 0.1 mg to about 1,000 mg. The specific dose level for any particular patient will vary depending upon a variety of factors, including the activity of the specific compound 20 employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration; the rate of excretion; drug combination; the severity of the particular disease being treated; and the form of administration. Typically, in vitro dosage-effect results provide useful 25 guidance on the proper doses for patient administration. Studies in animal models are also helpful. The considerations for determining the proper dose levels are well known in the art. The compounds can be administered with other agents for 30 treating vision loss, preventing vision degeneration, or promoting vision regeneration. Specific dose levels for such other agents will depend upon the factors previously stated and the effectiveness of the drug combination. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 111 EXAMPLES The following examples are illustrative of the present invention and are not intended to be limitations thereon. Unless otherwise indicated, all percentages are based upon 5 100% by weight of the final composition. Example 1 Synthesis of (2S)-2-({1-oxo-5-phenyl}-pentyl-1-(3,3 dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)pyrrolidine (1) 10 (2S) -2- (1-oxo-4-phenvl)butyl-N-benzVlpyrrolidine 1-chloro-4-phenylbutane (1.78 g; 10.5 mmol) in 20 mL of THF was added to 0.24 g (10 mmol) of magnesium turnings in 50 mL of refluxing THF. After the addition was complete, the mixture was refluxed for an additional 5 hours, and then 15 added slowly to a refluxing solution of N-benzyl-L-proline ethyl ester (2.30 g (10 mmol) in 100 mL of THF. After 2 hours of further reflux, the mixture was cooled and treated with 5 mL of 2 N HCl. The reaction mixture was diluted with ether (100 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO 3 , water and 20 brine. The organic phase was dried, concentrated and chromatographed, eluting with 5:1 CH 2 Cl 2 :EtOAc to obtain 2.05 g (64%) of the ketone as an oil. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ; 300 MHz) 1.49-2.18 (m, 8H) ; 2.32-2.46 (m, 1H); 2.56-2.65 (m, 2H); 2.97-3.06 (m, 1H); 3.17-3.34 (m, 1H); 3.44-3.62 (m, 1H); 25 4.02-4.23 (m, 2H) ; 7.01-7.44 (m, 10H). (2S)-2-(l-oxo-4-henyl)butylpyrrolidine The ketone compound (500 mg) and palladium hydroxide (20% on carbon, 50 mg) was hydrogenated at 40 psi in a Paar shaker overnight. The catalyst was removed by filtration and 30 the solvent was removed in vacuo. The free amine was obtained as a yellow oil (230 mg; 100%) . 'H NMR (CDCl3; 300 MHz): 1.75-2.34 (m, 10H); 2.55 (m, 2H); 2.95 (dm, 1H); 3.45 3.95 (m, 1H); 4.05 (m, 1H); 7.37 (m, 5H). (2S)-2-(l-oxo-4-phenyl)butvl-l-(1,2-dioxo-2 35 methoxyethvl) pyrrolidine -I uMC-roTrr k-UCC~~r IDII1 WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 112 To a solution of (2S)-2-(l-oxo-4-phenyl)butylpyrrolidine (230 mg; 1.0 mmol) in CH2Cl 2 (20 mL) at 0 0 C was added dropwise methyloxalyl chloride (135 mg; 1.1 mmol) . After stirring at 0 0 C for 3 hours, the reaction was quenched with saturated 5 NH 4 Cl and the organic phase was washed with water and brine and dried and concentrated. The crude residue was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 20:1 CH2Cl 2 :EtOAc to obtain 300 mg of the oxamate as a clear oil (98%) . 'H NMR (CDCl,; 300 MHz) : 1. 68 (m, 4H) ; 1. 91-2.38 (m, 4H) ; 2.64 (t, 10 2H); 3.66-3.80 (m, 2H); 3.77, 3.85 (s, 3H total); 4.16 (m, 2H) ; 4.90 (m, 1H) ; 7.16 (m, 3H) ; 7.27 (m, 2H). (2S)-2-({l-oxo-5-phenyl)-prentvl-1-(3,3-dimethvl-1,2 dioxopentyl)pyrrolidine (1) To a solution of the oxamate above (250 mg; 0.79 mmol) 15 in anhydrous ether (15 mL), cooled to - 78 0 C, was added 1,1 dimethylpropyl-magnesium chloride (0.8 mL of a 1.0 M solution in ether; 0.8 mmol) . After stirring the resulting mixture at -78 0 C for 2 hours, the reaction was quenched by the addition of 2 mL of saturated NH 4 Cl, followed by 100 mL of EtOAc. The 20 organic phase was washed with brine, dried, concentrated, and purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 50:1 CH2Cl2:EtOAc. Compound 1 was obtained as a clear oil, 120 mg. 'H NMR (CDCl,, 300 MHz) : 5 0.87 (t, 3H, = 7.5) ; 1.22 (s, 3H); 1.25 (s, 3H); 1.67 (m, 4H); 1.70-2.33 (m, 6H); 2.61 (t, 25 2H, J = 7.1); 3.52 (m, 2H) ; 4.17 (t, 2H, = 6.2) ; 4.52 (m, 1H) ; 7.16-7.49 (m, 5H) . Analysis calculated for C 2 2 H31NO3 H 2 0: C, 70.37; H, 8.86; N, 3.73. Found: 70.48; H, 8.35; N, 3.69. 30 Example 2 Synthesis of 2-phenyl-l-ethyl 1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-piperidinecarbothioate (10) Methyl(2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl)-2 pvrrolidinecarboxylate 35 A solution of L-proline methyl ester hydrochloride (3.08 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 113 g; 18.60 mmol) in dry methylene chloride was cooled to 0 0 C and treated with triethylamine (3.92 g; 38.74 mmol; 2.1 eq) . After stirring the formed slurry under a nitrogen atmosphere for 15 min, a solution of methyl oxalyl chloride (3.20 g; 5 26.12 mmol) in methylene chloride (45 mL) was added dropwise. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 1,5 hour. After filtering to remove solids, the organic phase was washed with water, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated. The crude residue was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 50% ethyl 10 acetate in hexane, to obtain 3.52 g (88%) of the product as a reddish oil. Mixture of cis-trans amide rotamers; data for trans rotamer given. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ) : 6 1.93 (dm, 2H) ; 2.17 (m, 2H) ; 3.62 (m, 2H); 3.71 (s, 3H) ; 3.79, 3.84 (s, 3H total) ; 4.86 (dd, 1H, J = 8.4, 3.3) . 15 Methyl(2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentvl)-2 pyrrolidinecarboxylate A solution of methyl (2S) -1- (1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate (2.35 g; 10.90 mmol) in 30 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was cooled to -78 0 C and treated with 20 14.2 mL of a 1.0 M solution of 1,1-dimethylpropylmagnesium chloride in THF. After stirring the resulting homogeneous mixture at -78 0 C for three hours, the mixture was poured into saturated ammonium chloride (100 mL) and extracted into ethyl acetate. The organic phase was washed with water, dried, and 25 concentrated, and the crude material obtained upon removal of the solvent was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 25% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 2.10 g (75%) of the oxamate as a colorless oil. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ) : 6 0.88 (t, 3H) ; 1.22, 1.26 (s, 3H each); 1.75(dm, 2H); 1.87-2.10 (m, 3H); 30 2.23 (m, 1H); 3.54 (m, 2H); 3.76 (s, 3H); 4.52 (dm, 1H, .i = 8.4, 3.4). (2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl)-2-pyrrolidine carboxylic acid A mixture of methyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3 35 dimethylpentyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate (2.10 g; 8.23 mmol), SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 114 1 N LiOH (15 mL), and methanol (50 mL) was stirred at 0 0 C for 30 minutes and at room temperature overnight. The mixture was acidified to pH 1 with 1 N HC1, diluted with water, and extracted into 100 mL of methylene chloride. The organic 5 extract was washed with brine and concentrated to deliver 1.73 g (87%) of snow-white solid which did not require further purification. 1H NMR (CDCl,): 5 0.87 (t, 3H) ; 1.22, 1.25 (s, 3H each) ; 1.77 (dm, 2H) ; 2.02 (m, 2H) ; 2.17 (m, 1H); 2.25 (m, 1H); 3.53 (dd, 2H, = 10.4, 7.3); 4.55 (dd, 1H, . = 10 8.6, 4.1). 2-iphenyl-l-ethyl 1-(3,3-dimethvl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2 piiperidinecarbothioate (10) To a solution of (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3- dimethylpentyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylic acid (241 mg; 1.0 mmol) in CH 2 Cl2 (10 15 mL) was added dicyclohexylcarbo-diimide (226 mg; 1.1 mmol). After stirring the resulting mixture for 5 minutes, the solution was cooled to 0 0 C and treated with a solution of phenyl mercaptan (138 mg; 1.0 mmol) and 4 dimethylaminopyridine (6 mg) in 5 ml of CHC12. The mixture 20 was allowed to warm to room temperature with stirring overnight. The solids were removed by filtration and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo; the crude residue was purified by flash chromatography (10:1 hexane:EtOAc) to obtain 302 mg (84%) of compound 10 as an oil. 'H NMR (CDCl3, 25 300 MHz): 5 0.85 (t, 3H, J = 7.5) ; 1.29 (s, 3H) ; 1.31 (s, 3H); 1.70-2.32 (m, 6H); 2.92 (t, 2H, J = 7.4); 3.22(t, 2H, i = 7.4) ; 3.58 (m, 2H) ; 4.72 (m, 1H); 7.23-7.34 (m, 5H) Analysis calculated for C2,H2 7 NO3S - 0.4 H20: C, 65.15; H, 7.60; N, 3.80. Found: C, 65.41; H, 7.49; N, 3.72. 30 Example 3 Synthesis of 2-phenyl-l-ethyl (2S)-1-(3,3 dimethyl-1, 2 -dioxopentyl) -2 -pyrrolidinecarbothioate (9) 35 Methyl 1- (1, 2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl) -2-piperidine-carboxylate SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 115 A solution of methyl pipecolate hydrochloride (8.50 g; 47.31 mmol) in dry methylene chloride (100 mL) was cooled to OC and treated with triethylamine (10.5 g; 103 mmol; 2.1 eq). After stirring the formed slurry under a nitrogen 5 atmosphere for 15 minutes, a solution of methyl oxalyl chloride (8.50 g; 69.4 mmol) in methylene chloride (75 mL) was added dropwise. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 1,5 hours. After filtering to remove solids, the organic phase was washed with water, dried over MgSO 4 and 10 concentrated. The crude residue was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 50% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 9.34 g (86%) of the product as a reddish oil. Mixture of cis-trans amide rotamers; data for trans rotamer given. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ) : 5 1.22-1.45 (m, 2H) ; 1.67-1.78 (m, 3H) ; 2.29 15 (m, 1H) ; 3.33 (m, 1H) ; 3.55 (m, 1H) ; 3.76 (s, 3H) ; 3.85, 3.87 (s, 3H total); 4.52 (dd, 1H). Methyl 1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl)-2-piperidine carboxylate A solution of methyl 1- (1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl) -2 20 piperidinecarboxylate (3.80 g; 16.57 mmol) in 75 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was cooled to -78 0 C and treated with 20.7 mL of a 1.0 M solution of 1,1-dimethyl-propylmagnesium chloride in THF. After stirring the resulting homogeneous mixture at -78'C for three hours, the mixture was poured into 25 saturated ammonium chloride (100 mL) and extracted into ethyl acetate. The organic phase was washed with water, dried, and concentrated, and the crude material obtained upon removal of the solvent was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 25% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 3.32 g (74%) of the 30 oxamate as a colorless oil. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ): 5 0.88 (t, 3H) 1.21, 1.25 (s, 3H each) ; 1.35-1.80 (m, 7H) ; 2.35 (m, 1H); 3.24 (m, 1H); 3.41 (m, 1H); 3.76 (s, 3H); 5.32 (d, 1H). 1- (1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl) -2-piperidine-carboxylic acid A mixture of methyl 1- (1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl) -2 35 piperidinecarboxylate (3.30 g; 12.25 mmol) , 1 N LiOH (15 mL), SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 116 and methanol (60 mL) was stirred at 0 0 C for 30 minutes and at room temperature overnight. The mixture was acidified to pH 1 with 1 N HCl, diluted with water, and extracted into 100 mL of methylene chloride. The organic extract was washed with 5 brine and concentrated to deliver 2.80 g (87%) of snow-white solid which did not require further purification. 'H NMR (CDC1 3 ) 5 0.89 (t, 3H) ; 1.21, 1.24 (s, 3H each); 1.42-1.85 (m, 7H); 2.35 (m, 1H); 3.22 (d, 1H); 3.42(m, 1H); 5.31 (d, 1H). 10 2-phenyl-1-ethyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2 pyrrolidinecarbothioate (9) To a solution of 1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl)-2 piperidine-carboxylic acid (255 mg; 1.0 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (226 mg; 1.1 mmol). 15 After stirring the resulting mixture for 5 minutes, the solution was cooled to OC and treated with a solution of phenyl mercaptan (138 mg; 1.0 mmol) and 4 dimethylaminopyridine (6 mg) in 5 ml of CH 2 Cl 2 . The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature with stirring 20 overnight. The solids were removed by filtration and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo; the crude residue was purified by flash chromatography (10:1 hexane:EtOAc) to obtain 300 mg (80%) of compound 9 as an oil. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 , 300 MHz): d 0. 94 (t, 3H, .1 = 7. 5) ; 1.27 (s, 3H) ; 1.30 (s, 25 3H) ; 1.34-1.88 (m, 7H) ; 2.45 (m, 1H) ; 2.90 (t, 2H, J = 7.7) ; 3.26 (t, 2H, J = 7.7) ; 3.27 (m, 1H) ; 3.38 (m, 1H) ; 5.34 (m, 1H) ; 7.24-7.36 (m, 5H) . Analysis calculated for C 21
H
29
NO
3 S: C, 67.17; H, 7.78; N, 3.73. Found: C, 67.02; H, 7.83; N, 3.78. 30 Example 4 Synthesis of 3-phenyl-1-propyl(2S)-l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 dioxopentyl)-2-(4-thiazolidine)carboxylate (80) 1-(1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethvl)2-(4-thiazolidine)-carboxvlate 35 A solution of L-thioproline (1.51 g; 11.34 mmol)in 40 mL SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 117 of dry methylene chloride was cooled to 0 0 C and treated with 3.3 mL (2.41 g; 23,81 mmol) of triethylamine. After stirring this mixture for 30 minutes, a solution of methyl oxalyl chloride (1.81 g; 14.74 mmol) was added dropwise. The 5 resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 1.5 hours, filtered through Celite to remove solids, dried and concentrated. The crude material was purified on a silic gel column, eluting with 10% MeOH in methylene chloride, to obtain 2.0 g of the oxamate as an orange-yellow solid. 10 3 -phenVl-1-propyl (2S) -1- (1, 2-dioxo-2-methoxyethvl) 2- (4 thiazolidine)carboxylate 1-(1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl)2-(4-thiazolidine) carboxylate (500 mg; 2.25 mmol) , 3-phenyl-l-propanol (465 mg; 3.42 mmol), dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (750 mg; 3.65 mmol), 4 15 dimethylaminopyridine (95 mg; 0.75 mmol) and camphorsulfonic acid (175 mg; 0.75 mmol) in 30 mL of methylene chloride were stirred together overnight. The mixture was filtered through Celite to remove solids and chromatographed (25% ethyl acetate/hexane) to obtain 690 mg of material. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 , 20 300 MHz): 51.92-2.01 (m, 2H) ; 2.61-2.69 (m, 2H) ; 3.34 (m, 1H); 4.11-4.25 (m, 2H); 4.73 (m, 1H); 5.34 (m, 1H); 7.12 (m, 3H) ; 7.23 (m, 2H) . 3-phenyl-1-propvl(2S)-l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-(4 thiazolidine)carboxylate (80) 25 A solution of 3-phenyl-1-propyl(2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-2 methoxyethyl)2-(4-thiazolidine)carboxylate (670 mg; 1.98 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) was cooled to -78'C and treated with 2.3 mL of a 1.0 M solution of 1,1 dimethylpropylmagnesium chloride in ether. After stirring 30 the mixture for 3 hours, it was poured into saturated ammonium chloride, extracted into ethyl acetate, and the organic phase was washed with water, dried and concentrated. The crude material was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 25% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 380 mg of 35 the compound of Example 4 as a yellow oil. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 , 300 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 118 MHz): d 0.86 (t, 3H); 1.21 (s, 3H); 1.26 (s, 3H); 1.62-1.91 (m, 3H); 2.01 (m, 2H); 2.71 (m, 2H); 3.26-3.33 (m, 2H); 4.19 (m, 2H); 4.58 (m, 1H); 7.19 (m, 3H); 7.30 (m, 2H) . Analysis calculated for C 20
H
27
NO
4 S: C, 63.63; H, 7.23; N, 3.71. Found: 5 C, 64.29; H, 7.39; N, 3.46. Example 5 Synthesis of 3-(3-pyridyl) -1-propvl(2S)-1-(3,3-dimethvl 1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-(4-thiazolidine) carboxylate (81) 10 The compound of Example 5 was prepared according to the procedure of Example 4, using 3- (3-pyridyl) -1-propanol in the final step, to yield 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propyl(2S)-1-(3,3 dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) -2- (4-thiazolidine)carboxylate. 1H NMR (CDCl 3 , 300 MHz): 5 0.89 (t, 3H, .i = 7.3); 1.25 (s, 3H); 15 1.28 (s, 3H); 1.77 (q, 2H, i = 7.3) ; 2.03 (tt, 2H, J = 6.4, 7.5); 2.72 (t, 2H, . = 7.5); 3.20 (dd, 1H, . = 4.0, 11.8) ; 3.23 (dd, 1H, J = 7.0, 11.8); 4.23 (t, 2H, J = 6.4) ; 4.55 (d, 2H, J = 8.9) ; 5.08 (dd, 1H, i = 4.0, 7.0) ; 7.24 (m, 1H) ; 8.48 (m, 2H) . Analysis calculated for C,,H 26
N
2 0 4 S - 0.5 H 2 0: C, 20 58.89; H, 7.02; N, 7.23. Found: C, 58.83; H, 7.05; N, 7.19. Example 6 Synthesis of 3- (3-pyridyl) -1-propyl (28) -1- (3,3-Dimethyl 1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, N-oxide (95) 25 Methyl (2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl)-2 pvrrolidinecarboxylate A solution of L-proline methyl ester hydrochloride (3.08 g; 18.60 mmol) in dry methylene chloride was cooled to OC and treated with triethylamine (3.92 g; 38.74 mmol; 2.1 eq) . 30 After stirring the formed slurry under a nitrogen atmosphere for 15 minutes, a solution of methyl oxalyl chloride (3.20 g; 26.12 mmol) in methylene chloride (45 mL) was added dropwise. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 1.5 hour. After filtering to remove solids, the organic phase was washed with SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 119 water, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated. The crude residue was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 50% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 3.52 g (88%) of the product as a reddish oil. Mixture of cis-trans amide rotamers; data for 5 trans rotamer given. 1H NMR (CDCl,) : 5 1.93 (dm, 2H) ; 2.17 (m, 2H) ; 3.62 (m, 2H); 3.71 (s, 3H); 3.79, 3.84 (s, 3H total) ; 4.86 (dd, 1H, .i = 8.4, 3.3) . Methyl(2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl)-2 vyrrolidinecarboxvlate 10 A solution of methyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate (2.35 g; 10.90 mmol) in 30 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was cooled to -78 0 C and treated with 14.2 mL of a 1.0 M solution of 1,1-dimethylpropylmagnesium chloride in THF. After stirring the resulting homogeneous 15 mixture at -78 0 C for three hours, the mixture was poured into saturated ammonium chloride (100 mL) and extracted into ethyl acetate. The organic phase was washed with water, dried, and concentrated, and the crude material obtained upon removal of the solvent was purified on a silica gel column, eluting 20 with 25% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 2.10 g (75%) of the oxamate as a colorless oil. 'H NMR (CDCl3) : 5 0.88 (t, 3H); 1.22, 1.26 (s, 3H each); 1.75 (dm, 2H); 1.87-2.10 (m, 3H); 2.23 (m, 1H); 3.54 (m, 2H); 3.76 (s, 3H); 4.52 (dm, 1H, .J = 8.4, 3.4). 25 (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylipentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylic acid A mixture of methyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3 dimethylpentyl-2-pyrrolidine-carboxylate (2.10 g; 8.23 mmol) , 1 N LiOH (15 mL), and methanol (50 mL) was stirred at 0 0 C for 30 30 minutes and at room temperature overnight. The mixture was acidified to pH 1 with 1 N HCl, diluted with water, and extracted into 100 mL of methylene chloride. The organic extract was washed with brine and concentrated to deliver 1.73 g (87%) of snow-white solid which did not require 35 further purification. 'H NMR (CDCl3): d 0.87 (t, 3H) ; 1.22, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 120 1.25 (s, 3H each) ; 1.77 (dm, 2H) ; 2.02 (m, 2H) ; 2.17 (m, 1H); 2.25 (m, 1H); 3.53 (dd, 2H, J = 10.4, 7.3); 4.55 (dd, 1H, i = 8.6, 4.1) . 3-(3-Pyridyl)-l-propy l(2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentvl) 5 2-lpyvrrolidinecarboxylate A mixture of (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl)-2 pyrrolidinecarboxylic acid (4.58 g; 19 mmol), 3 pyridinepropanol (3.91 g; 28.5 mmol), dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (6.27 g; 30.4 mmol) , camphorsulfonic 10 acid (1.47 g; 6.33 mmol) and 4-dimethyl aminopyridine (773 mg; 6.33 mmol) in methylene chloride (100 mL) was stirred overnight under a nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite to remove solids and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was triturated with several 15 portions of ether, and the ether portions were filtered through Celite to remove solids and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated filtrate was purified on a flash column (gradient elution, 25% ethyl acetate in hexane to pure ethyl acetate) to obtain 5.47 g (80%) of GPI 1046 as a colorless 20 oil (partial hydrate) . 'H NMR (CDCl 3 , 300 MHz) : 5 0.85 (t, 3H); 1.23, 1.26 (s, 3H each); 1.63-1.89 (m, 2H); 1.90-2.30 (m, 4H); 2.30-2.50 (m, 1H); 2.72 (t, 2H); 3.53 (m, 2H); 4.19 (m, 2H) ; 4.53 (m, 1H) ; 7.22 (m, 1H) ; 7.53 (dd, 1H) ; 8.45. Analysis calculated for C 20
H
28
NO
4 - 0.25 H 2 0: C, 65.82; H, 25 7.87; N, 7.68. Found: C, 66.01; H, 7.85; N, 7.64. 3-(3-Pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, N-oxide (95) A solution of 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3 dimethyl-1, 2-dioxopentyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate (190 mg; 30 0.52 mmol) and m-chloroperbenzoic acid (160 mg of 57%-86% material, 0.53 mmol) was stirred in methylene chloride (20 mL) at room temperature for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride and washed twice with 1 N NaOH. The organic extract was dried and concentrated, and 35 the crude material was chromatographed, eluting with 10% SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 121 methanol in ethyl acetate, to obtain 130 mg of the Compound 95 of Example 6. 'H NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) 5 0.83 (t, 3H); 1.21 (s, 3H); 1.25 (s, 3H); 1.75-2.23 (m, 8H); 2.69 (t, 2H, J = 7.5); 3.52 (t, 2H, J = 6.3) ; 4.17 (dd, 2H, J = 6.3) ; 4.51 5 (m, 1H); 7.16-7.22 (m, 2H) ; 8.06-8.11 (m, 2H) . Analysis calculated for C 20
H
28
N
2 0 5 - 0.75 H 2 0: C, 61.60; H, 7.63; N, 7.18. Found: C, 61.79; H, 7.58; N, 7.23. Example 7 10 Synthesis of 3-(3-Pyridyl)-1-propylmercaptyl 2S-1-[(2 methylbutyl)carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (101) 3-(3-Pyridyl)-1-proTplchloride To a solution of 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propanol (10 g; 72.4 mmol) in chloroform (100 mL) was added dropwise a solution of 15 thionyl chloride (12.9 g; 108.6 mmol) in chloroform (50 mL) . The resulting mixture was refluxed for 1 hour, then poured into ice-cold 50% aqueous potassium hydroxide (150 mL). The layers were separated, and the organic phase was dried, concentrated, and purified on a silica gel column, eluting 20 with 40% ethylacetate in hexane, to obtain 10 g (65%) of the chloride as a clear oil. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl,) : 5 2.02-2.11 (m, 2H) ; 2.77 (m, 2H) ; 3.51 (m, 2H) ; 7.20 (m, 1H) ; 7.49 (m, 1H) ; 8.45 (m, 2H). 3-(3-Pyridyl)-l-propvlmercaptan 25 A mixture of 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propylchloride (3 g; 19.4 mmol) and thiourea (1.48 g; 19.4 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) was refluxed for 24 hours. Aqueous sodium hydroxide, 15 mL of a 0.75 N solution, was added, and the mixture was refluxed for an additional 2 hours. After cooling to room temperature, 30 the solvent was removed in vacuo. Chromatographic purification of the crude thiol on a silica gel column eluting with 50% ethyl acetate in hexane delivered 1.2 g of 3-(3-Pyridyl)-1-propylmercaptan as a clear liquid. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) : 5 1.34 (m, 1H) ; 1.90 (m, 2H) ; 2.52 (m, 2H); 35 2.71 (m, 2H) ; 7.81 (m, 1H) ; 7.47 (m, 1H) ; 8.42 (m, 2H). SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 122 3- (3-Pyridyl)-1-propylmerca-ptyl N- (tert butyloxycarbonyl) pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate A mixture of N- (tert-butyloxycarbonyl) - (S) -proline (3.0 g; 13. 9 mmol) ; 3 - (3 - Pyridyl) -1-propylmercaptan (3. 20 g; 20. 9 5 mmol), dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (4.59 g; 22.24 mmol), camphorsulfonic acid (1.08 g; 4.63 mmol), and 4 dimethylaminopyridine (0.60 g; 4.63 mmol) in dry methylene chloride (100 mL) was stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride (50 mL) and water 10 (100 mL), and the layers were separated. The organic phase was washed with water (3 x 100 mL), dried over magnesium sulfate, and concentrated, and the crude residue was purified on a silica gel column eluting with ethyl acetate to obtain 4.60 g (95%) of the thioester as a thick oil. 'H NMR (300 15 MHz, CDCl 3 ): 6 1.45 (s, 9H) ; 1.70-2.05 (m, 5H) ; 2.32 (m, 1H); 2.71 (t, 2H); 2.85 (m, 2H); 3.50 (m, 2H); 4.18 (m, 1H); 7.24 (m, 1H) ; 7.51 (m, 1H); 8.48 (m, 2H). 3- (3-Pyridyl) -l-propylmercaptvl pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate A solution of 3-(3-Pyridyl)-1-mercaptyl N-(tert 20 butyloxycarbonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (4.60 g; 13.1 mmol) in methylene chloride (60 mL) and trifluoroacetic acid (6 mL) was stirred at room temperature for three hours. Saturated potassium carbonate was added until the pH was basic, and the reaction mixture was extracted with methylene 25 chloride (3x) . The combined organic extracts were dried and concentrated to yield 2.36 g (75%) of the free amine as a thick oil. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) : 6 1.87-2.20 (m, 6H) ; 2.79 (m, 2H) ; 3.03-3.15 (m, 4H total) ; 3.84 (m, 1H) ; 7.32 (m, 1H) 7.60 (m, 1H) ; 8.57 (m, 2H). 30 3- (3-Pyridyl) -1-propylmercaptyl 2S -1- [(2 methylbutyl)carbamoyllpyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (101) A solution of 2-methylbutylamine (113 mg; 1.3 mmol) and triethylamine (132 mg; 1.3 mmol) in methylene chloride (5 mL) was added to a solution of triphosgene (128 mg; 0.43 mmol) in 35 methylene chloride (5 mL) . The resulting mixture was SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 123 refluxed for 1 hour and then cooled to room temperature. 3 (3-Pyridyl) -1-propylmercaptyl pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (300 mg; 1.3 mmol) in 5 mL of methylene chloride was added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 1 hour and then partitioned 5 between water and a 1:1 mixture of ethyl acetate and hexane. The organic phase was dried, concentrated and purified by column chromatography (50% ethyl acetate/hexane) to obtain 250 mg (55%) of the compound of Example 7 (Compound 101, Table VII) as an oil. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) : d 'H NMR 10 (CDCl 3 , 300 MHz) : 5 0.89-0.93 (m, 6H) ; 1.10-1.20 (m, 1H); 1.27 (s, 1H); 1.36-1.60 (m, 2H); 1.72 (s, 2H); 1.97-2.28 (m, 6H) ; 2.70-2.75 (m, 2H) ; 2.92-3.54 (m, 6H) ; 4.45-4.47 (m, 1H); 7.21-7.29 (m, 1H) ; 7.53-7.56 (dd, 1H) ; 8.46-8.48 (s, 2H). 15 Example 8 Synthesis of 3-(3-Pyridyl)-1-propyl 2S-1-[(1',l' Dimethylpropyl) carbamoyl] pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (102) Reaction of 3- (3-pyridyl) -1-propylmercaptyl pyrrolidine 2-carboxylate with the isocyanate generated from tert 20 amylamine and triphosgene, as described for Example 7, provided the compound of Example 8 (Compound 102, Table VII) in 62% yield. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 , 300 MHz) 5 0.83 (t, 3H) ; 1.27 (s, 6H); 1.64-1.71 (m, 2H); 1.91-2.02 (m, 7H); 2.66-2.71 (t, 2H) ; 2.85 (m, 2H) ; 3.29-3.42 (m, 2H); 4.11 (br, 1H) ; 4.37 25 4.41 (m, 1H). Example 9 Synthesis of 3- (3-pyridyl) -1-propylmercaptyl 2S-1 [(cyclohexyl) thiocarbamoyl] -pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (107) 30 A mixture of cyclohexylisothiocyanate (120 mg; 0.9 mmol), 3- (3-pyridyl) -1-propylmercaptyl pyrrolidine-2 carboxylate (200 mg; 0.9 mmol) and triethylamine (90 mg; 0.9 mmol) in 20 mL of methylene chloride was stirred for 1 hour and then partitioned between water and a 1:1 mixture of ethyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 124 acetate and hexane. The organic phase was dried, concentrated and purified by column chromatography (50% ethyl acetate/hexane) to obtain 160 mg (47%) of the compound of Example 9 (Compound 107, Table VII) . 'H NMR (CDCl 3 , 300 MHz): 5 5 1.16-1.40 (m, 6H) ; 1.50-1.71 (m, 4H) ; 1.95-2.08 (m, 7H); 2.70-2.75 (t, 2H); 3.03 (m, 2H); 3.40-3.60 (m, 2H); 4.95-4.98 (d, 1H) ; 5.26-5.29 (d, 1H) ; 7.17-7.25 (m, 1H). Example 10 10 Synthesis of 3- (para-Methoxvphenyl) -l-propylmercaptyl (28) N- (benzenesulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (120) 3- (7p-Methoxyohenyl) -1-propylbromide To a solution of 3- (p-methoxyphenyl) -1-propanol (16.6 g; 0.1 mol) in 250 mL of toluene, cooled to OC, was added 15 dropwise 26 mL of phosphorus tribromide (0.27 mol). Following completion of the addition, the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, then refluxed for an additional hour. The reaction was cooled and poured onto ice, the layers were separated, and the organic phase washed 20 with saturated sodium bicarbonate (3x) and brine (3x) . The crude material obtained upon drying and evaporation of the solvent was chromatographed, eluting with 10% EtOAc/hexane, to obtain 14 g (61%) of 3- (p-methoxyphenyl) -1-propylbromide. 3- ( P-Methoxvphenyl) -1-propylmercaptan 25 A mixture of 3 - (p-methoxyphenyl) -1-propylbromide (14 g; 61 mmol) and thiourea (5.1 g; 67 mmol) in ethanol (150 mL) was refluxed for 48 hours. Evaporation of the solvent provided a clear glassy compound, which was dissolved in 50 mL of water and treated with 100 mL of 40% aqueous sodium 30 hydroxide. After stirring the resulting mixture for two hours, the product was extracted into ether (3x) , and the combined organic extracts were washed with sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried, and concentrated. Chromatographic purification of the crude thiol on a silica gel column 35 eluting with 2% either in hexane delivered 10.2 g of 3-(p- WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 125 methoxyphenyl) - 1-propylmercaptan as a clear liquid. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) : 5 1.34 (t, 1H) ; 1.88-1.92 (m, 2H) ; 2.49 2.53 (m, 2H); 2.64-2.69 (m, 2H); 3.77 (s, 3H); 6.80-6.84 (m, 2H); 7.06-7.24 (m, 2H). 5 3- (P-Methoxyphenyl)-1-mercaptyl N- (tert butyloxycarbonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate A mixture of N- (tert-butyloxycarbonyl) - (S) -proline (2.0 g; 9. 29 mmol) , 3 - (p-methoxyphenyl) -1-propylmercaptan (1.86 g; 10.22 mmol), 1- (3 -dimethylaminopropyl) -3 -ethylcarbodiimide 10 hydrochloride (1.96 g; 10.22 mmol), and 4 dimethylaminopyridine (catalytic) in dry methylene chloride (50 mL) was stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride (50 mL) and water 100 (mL), and the layers were separated. The organic phase was washed 15 with water (3 x 100 mL), dried over magnesium sulfate, and concentrated to provide 3.05 g of the product (100%) as a thick oil. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ): 5 1.15 (s, 9H); 1.84 2.31 (m, 6H); 2.61 (m, 2H); 2.83 (m, 2H); 3.51 (m, 2H); 3.75 (s, 3H) ; 6.79 (d, 2H, J = 8.04) ; 7.05 (m, 2H) . 20 3- (p-Methoxvphenyl) -1-mercaptyl pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate A solution of 3-(p-methoxyphenyl)-mercaptyl N-(tert butyloxycarbonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (3.0 g; 8.94 mmol) in methylene chloride (60 mL) and trifluoroacetic acid (6 mL) was stirred at room temperature for three hours. Saturated 25 potassium carbonate was added until the pH was basic, and the reaction mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (3x). The combined organic extracts were dried and concentrated to yield 1.73 g (69%) of the free amine as a thick oil. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) : 5 1.80-2.23 (m, 6H) ; 2.62 (m, 2H) ; 2.81 30 (m, 2H); 3.01 (m, 2H); 3.75 (s, 3H); 3.89(m, 1H); 6.81 (m, 2H) ; 7. 06 (m, 2H) . 3-(Para-Methoxyphenyl)-l-propvlmercaptvl (2S)-N (benzenesulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (120) A solution of 3-(p-methoxyphenyl)-1-mercaptyl 35 pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (567 mg; 2.03 mmol) and SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 126 benzenesulfonyl chloride (358 mg; 2.03 mmol) in methylene chloride (5 mL) was treated with diisopropylethylamine (290 mg; 2.23 mmol) and stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was filtered to remove solids and 5 applied directly to a silica gel column, eluting with 25% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 540 mg of Compound 120 (Table VIII) as a clear oil. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ): 5 1.65-1.89 (m, 6H); 2.61 (t, 2H, J = 7.3); 2.87 (t, 2H, J = 7.6); 3.26 (m, 1H); 3.54 (m, 1H); 3.76 (s, 3H); 4.34 (dd, 1H, 10 J = 2.7, 8.6); 6.79 (d, 2H, J = 8.7); 7.06 (d, 2H, J = 8.6); 7.49-7.59 (m, 3H); 7.86 (dd, 2H, = 1.5, 6.8) Example 11 Synthesis of 3-(para-Methoxyphenyl)-1-propylmercaptyl(2S) 15 N-((-toluenesulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (121) A solution of 3-(p-Methoxyphenyl)-1-mercaptyl pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (645 mg; 2.30 mmol) and a toluenesulfonyl chloride (440 mg; 2.30 mmol) in methylene chloride (5 mL) was treated with diisopropylethylamine (330 20 mg; 2.53 mmol) and stirred overnight at room temperature. Purification as described for Example 10 provided the compound of Example 11 (Compound 121, Table VIII) as a clear oil. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) : 5 1.65-2.25 (m, 8H); 2.65 (t, 2H); 2.89-2.96 (m, 2H); 3.55-3.73 (m, 2H); 3.80 (s, 3H); 4.32 25 (s, 2H); 4.70-4.81 (m, 1H); 6.83 (d, 2H); 7.09 (d, 2H); 7.14 (m, 3H); 7.26 (m, 2H). Example 12 Synthesis of 3-(para-Methoxvphenyl)-1-propylmercaptyl(2S) 30 N-(a-toluenesulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (122) A solution of 3-(p-methoxyphenyl)-1-mercaptyl pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (567 mg; 2.30 mmol) and p toluenesulfonyl chloride (425 mg; 2.23 mmol) in methylene chloride (5 mL) was stirred overnight at room temperature. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 127 Purification as described for Example 10 provided the compound of Example 12 (Compound 122, Table VIII) as a clear oil. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ): 5 1.67-1.94 (m, 6H); 2.40 (s, 3H); 2.61 (t, 2H, i = 7.3) ; 2.84 (m, 2H, J = 7.2); 3.22 (m, 5 1H); 3.52 (m, 1H); 3.76 (s, 3H); 4.32 (dd, 1H, J-2.9, 8.5); 6.79 (d, 2H, J = 6.5); 7.07 (d, 2H, .i = 6.5) ; 7.29 (d, 2H, = 6.5) ; 7.74 (d, 2H, J = 6.5) . Example 13 10 Synthesis of 1,5-Diphenyl-3-pentylmercaptyl N-(para toluenesulfonyl)pipecolate (134) 3-Phenyl-1-propanal Oxalyl chloride (2.90 g; 2.29 mmol) in methylene chloride (50 mL), cooled to -78 0 C, was treated with 15 dimethylsulf oxide (3.4 mL) in 10 mL of methylene chloride. After stirring for 5 min, 3-phenyl-1-propanol (2.72 g; 20 mmol) in 20 mL of methylene chloride was added, and the resulting mixture was stirred at -78 0 C for 15 min, treated with 14 mL of triethylamine, stirred an additional 15 min, 20 and poured into 100 mL of water. The layers were separated, the organic phase was dried and concentrated, and the crude residue was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 10% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 1.27 g (47%) of the aldehyde as a clear oil. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl,) 5 2.80 (m, 25 2H); 2.98 (m, 2H); 7.27 (m, 5H); 9.81 (2, 1H). 1,5-Diphenyl-3--pentanol A solution of 2- (bromoethyl) benzene (1.73 g; 9.33 mmol) in diethylether (10 mL) was added to a stirred slurry of magnesium turnings (250 mg; 10.18 mmol) in 5 mL of ether. 30 The reaction was initiated with a heat gun, and after the addition was complete the mixture was heated on an oil bath for 30 min. 3-Phenyl-l-propanal (1.25 g; 9.33 mmol) was added in 10 mL of ether, and reflux was continued for 1 hour. The reaction was cooled and quenched with saturated ammonium 35 chloride, extracted into 2x ethyl acetate, and the combined SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 128 organic portions were dried and concentrated. Chromatographic purification on a silica gel column (10% ethyl acetate in hexane) delivered 1.42 g(63%) of the diphenyl alcohol. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ): 5 1.84 (m, 4H); 5 2.61-2.76(m, 4H); 3.65 (m, 1H); 7.19-7.29 (m, 10H). 1,5-Diphenyl-3-bromopentane To a solution of 1,5-diphenyl-3-pentanol (1.20 g (5 mmol) and carbon tetrabromide (1.67 g; 5 mmol) in methylene chloride (20 mL) was added triphenylphosphine (1.31 g; 5 10 mmol) portionwise, at 0 0 C. After stirring at room temperature for 18 hours, the mixture was concentrated, triturated with ether, and the solids removed by filtration. The filtrate was passed through a plug of silica gel, eluting with hexane:methylene chloride, 10:1, to give 1.35 g (90%) of 15 the bromide as an oil which was used without further purification. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) 6 2.11-2.18 (m, 4H) 2.73 (m, 2H) ; 2.86 (m, 2H) ; 3.95 (m, 1H) ; 7.16-7.30 (m, 10H) 1,5-Diphenvl-3-pentvlmercaptan Using the procedure described in Example 10 for the 20 conversion of bromides to thiols, 1,5-diphenyl-3-bromopentane was converted to 1,5-diphenyl-3-pentylmercaptan in 35% overall yield. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) : 5 1.79 (m, 2H) ; 1.98 (m, 2H) ; 2.71 (m, 3H) ; 2.80 (m, 2H) ; 7.16-7.28 (m, 10H). 1,5-Diphenyl-3-pentvlmercaptvl N-(tert 25 butyloxvcarbonvl) pyrrolidine-2 -carboxylate A mixture of N- (tert-butyloxycarbonyl) - (S) -pipecolic acid (2.11 g; 9.29 mmol) , 1,5-diphenyl-3-pentylmercaptan (2.58 g; 10.22 mmol), 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3 ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (1.96 g; 10.22 mmol) and 4 30 dimethylaminopyridine (catalytic) in dry methylene chloride (50 mL) was stirred overnight. the reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride (50 mL) and water (100 mL), and the layers were separated. The organic phase was washed with water (3 x 100 mL) , dried over magnesium sulfate, and 35 concentrated to provide 870 mg (20%) of the product as a SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 129 thick oil, which was used without further purification. 1, 5-Diphenyl-3-pentvlmercaptyl pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate A solution of 1,5-diphenyl-3-pentylmercaptyl N-(tert butyloxycarbonyl) pyrrolidine -2 - carboxylate (850 mg; 1.8 mmol) 5 in methylene chloride (10 mL) and trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) was stirred at room temperature for three hours. Saturated potassium carbonate was added until the pH was basic, and the reaction mixture was extracted with methylene chloride. The combined organic extracts were dried and concentrated to 10 yield 480 mg (72%) of the free amine as a thick oil, which was used without further purification. 1,5-Diiphenyl-3-pentvlmercaptyl N-(para toluenesulfonyl) pipecolate (134) 1,5-Diphenyl-3-pentylmercaptyl N-(para 15 toluenesulfonyl)pipecolate(18) was prepared from 1,5 diphenyl-3-pentylmercaptyl pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate and para-toluenesulfonyl chloride as described for Example 12, in 65% yield. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 , 300 MHz): 5 0.80 (m, 4H) ; 1.23 1.97 (m, 5H); 2.15 (d, 1H); 2.61-2.69 (m, 4H); 3.23 (m, 1H); 20 3.44 (dm, 1H) ; 4.27 (s, 2H) ; 4.53 (d, 1H, J = 4.5) ; 5.06 (m, 1H); 7.16-7.34 (m, 15H). Example 14 Synthesis of 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 25 dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate (137) Methyl (2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl)-2 pyrrolidinecarboxylate A solution of L-proline methyl ester hydrochloride (3.08 g; 18.60 mmol) in dry methylene chloride was cooled to OC 30 and treated with triethylamine (3.92 g; 38.74 mmol; 2.1 eq) . After stirring the formed slurry under a nitrogen atmosphere for 15 min, a solution of methyl oxalyl chloride (3.20 g; 26.12 mmol) in methylene chloride (45 mL) was added dropwise. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 1.5 hour. After 35 filtering to remove solids, the organic phase was washed with at IDeTITI TC QUCCT IDI II C O\ WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 130 water, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated. The crude residue was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 50% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 3.52 g (88%) of the product as a reddish oil. Mixture of cis-trans amide rotamers; data for 5 trans rotamer given. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ) : d 1. 93 (dm, 2H) ; 2 .17 (m, 2H) ; 3.62 (m, 2H); 3.71 (s, 3H) ; 3.79, 3.84 (s, 3H total) ; 4.86 (dd, 1H, J = 8.4, 3.3) . Methyl (2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl)-2 pyrrolidinecarboxylate 10 A solution of methyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl) 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate (2.35 g; 10.90 mmol) in 30 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was cooled to -78 0 C and treated with 14.2 mL of a 1.0 M solution of 1,1-dimethylpropylmagnesium chloride in THF. After stirring the resulting homogeneous 15 mixture at -78 0 C for three hours, the mixture was poured into saturated ammonium chloride (100 mL) and extracted into ethyl acetate. The organic phase was washed with water, dried, and concentrated, and the crude material obtained upon removal of the solvent was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 20 25% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 2.10 g (75%) of the oxamate as a colorless oil. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ): d 0.88 (t, 3H); 1.22, 1.26 (s, 3H each); 1.75 (dm, 2H); 1.87-2.10 (m, 3H); 2.23 (m, 1H); 3.54 (m, 2H); 3.76 (s, 3H); 4.52 (dm, 1H, J = 8.4, 3.4). 25 Synthesis of (2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl)-2 pyrrolidinecarboxylic acid A mixture of methyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3 dimethylpentyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate (2.10 g; 8.23 mmol) , 1 N LiOH (15 mL), and methanol (50 mL) was stirred at 0 0 C for 30 30 minutes and at room temperature overnight. The mixture was acidified to pH 1 with 1 N HCl, diluted with water, and extracted into 100 mL of methylene chloride. The organic extract was washed with brine and concentrated to deliver 1.73 g (87%) of snow-white solid which did not require 35 further purification. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ): d 0.87 (t, 3H) ; 1.22, SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 131 1.25 (s, 3H each) ; 1.77 (dm, 2H) ; 2.02 (m, 2H) ; 2.17 (m, 1H); 2.25 (m, 1H); 3.53 (dd, 2H, = 10.4, 7.3); 4.55 (dd, 1H, = 8.6, 4.1) . 3-Phenyl-l-propyl (2S)-l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2 5 pyrrolidinecarboxylate (137) A mixture of (2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl)-2 pyrrolidine-carboxylic acid (600 mg; 2.49 mmol) , 3-phenyl-1 propanol (508 mg; 3.73 mmol), dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (822 mg; 3.98 mmol), camphorsulfonic acid (190 mg; 0.8 mmol) and 10 4-dimethylaminopyridine (100 mg; 0.8 mmol) in methylene chloride (20 mL) was stirred overnight under a nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite to remove solids and concentrated in vacuo, and the crude material was purified on a flash column (25% ethyl acetate in 15 hexane) to obtain 720 mg (80%) of Example 14 as a colorless oil. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ) : d 0.84 (t, 3H) ; 1.19 (s, 3H) ; 1.23 (s, 3H) ; 1.70 (dm, 2H) ; 1.98 (m, 5H) ; 2.22 (m, 1H) ; 2.64 (m, 2H); 3.47 (m, 2H); 4.14 (m, 2H); 4.51 (d, 1H); 7.16 (m, 3H); 7.26 (m, 2H). 20 Example 15 The method of Example 14 was utilized to prepare the following illustrative compounds. 25 Compound 138: 3-phenyl-1-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-1-(3,3 dimethyl-1, 2-dioxopentyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 80%. 'H NMR (360 Mhz, CDCl 3 ): d 0.86 (t, 3H) ; 1.21 (s, 3H) ; 1.25 (s, 3H); 1.54-2.10 (m, 5H); 2.10-2.37 (m, 1H); 3.52-3.55 (m, 2H); 4.56 (dd, 1H, J = 3.8, 8.9) ; 4.78-4.83 (m, 2H) ; 6.27 (m, 1H) ; 30 6 .67 (dd, 1H, = 15. 9) ; 7.13--7. 50 (m, 5H) . Compound 139: 3-(3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl)-l-propyl (2S)-l (3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidine- carboxylate, 61%. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ): d 0.84 (t, 3H); 1.15 (s, 3H); 1.24 (s, 35 3H) ; 1.71 (dm, 2H) ; 1.98 (m, 5H) ; 2.24 (m, 1H) ; 2.63 (m, 2H) SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 132 3.51 (t, 2H); 3.79 (s, 3H); 3.83 (s, 3H); 4.14 (m, 2H); 4.52 (m, 1H) ; 6.36 (s, 2H) . Compound 140: 3- (3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl) -1-prop-2- (E) -enyl 5 (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidine carboxylate, 66%. 'H NMR (CDC1 3 ) : d 0.85 (t, 3H) ; 1.22 (s, 3H); 1.25 (s, 3H); 1.50-2.11 (m, 5H) ; 2.11-2.40 (m, 1H) ; 3.55 (m, 2H); 3.85 (s, 3H); 3.88 (s, 6H); 4.56 (dd, 1H); 4.81 (m, 2H); 6.22 (m, 1H); 6.58 (d, 1H, . = 16) ; 6.63 (s, 2H). 10 Compound 141: 3 - (4, 5-methylenedioxyphenyl) -1-propyl (2S) -1 (3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidine- carboxylate, 82%. 'H NMR (360 MHz, CDC1) : d 0.86 (t, 3H) ; 1.22 (s, 3H) ; 1.25 (s, 3H) ; 1.60-2.10 (m, 5H) ; 3.36-3.79 (m, 2H); 4.53 (dd, 15 1H, . = 3.8, 8.6) ; 4.61-4.89 (m, 2H) ; 5.96 (s, 2H); 6.10 (m, 1H) ; 6.57 (dd, 1H, J = 6.2, 15.8) ; 6.75 (d, 1H, i = 8.0) ; 6.83 (dd, 1H, . = 1.3, 8.0) ; 6.93 (s, 1H) . Compound 142: 3 - (4, 5-methylenedioxyphenyl) -1-prop-2 - (E) -enyl 20 (2S) -1- (3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) -2 pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 82%. 'H NMR (360 MHz, CDC1 3 ) : d 0.86 (t, 3H) ; 1.22 (s, 3H) ; 1.25 (s, 3H) ; 1.60-2.10 (m, 5H) ; 2.10 2.39 (m, 1H) ; 3.36-3.79 (m, 2H) ; 4.53 (dd, 1H, .= 3.8, 8.6) ; 4.61-4.89 (m, 2H); 5.96 (s, 2H); 6.10 (m, 1H); 6.57 (dd, 1H, 25 J = 6.2, 15.8); 6.75 (d, 1H, J = 8.0); 6.83 (dd, 1H, J= 1.3, 8.0); 6.93 (s, 1H). Compound 144: 3-cyclohexyl-1-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-1-(3,3 dimethyl -1, 2 -dioxopentyl) -2 -pyrrolidine - carboxylate, 92%. 'H 30 NMR (360 MHz, CDC1 3 ) : d 0.86 (t, 3H) ; 1.13-1.40 (m + 2 singlets, 9H total); 1.50-1.87 (m, 8H); 1.87-2.44 (m, 6H); 3.34-3.82 (m, 2H); 4.40-4.76 (m, 3H); 5.35-5.60 (m, 1H); 5.60-5.82 (dd, 1H, J = 6.5, 16) . 35 Compound 145: (1R)-1,3-Diphenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 133 dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 90%. 'H NMR (360 MHz, CDCl3): d 0.85 (t, 3H); 1.20 (s, 3H); 1.23 (s, 3H) ; 1.49-2.39 (m, 7H) ; 2.46-2.86 (m, 2H) ; 3.25-3.80 (m, 2H) ; 4.42-4.82 (m, 1H); 5.82 (td, 1H, J= 1.8, 6.7); 7.05-7.21 (m, 5 3H) ; 7.21-7.46 (m, 7H). Compound 146: 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S) -1- (1,2-dioxo-2- [2 furanyl])ethyl-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 99%. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC1): d 1.66-2.41 (m, 6H) ; 2.72 (t, 2H, = 7.5); 3.75 10 (m, 2H); 4.21 (m, 2H); 4.61 (m, 1H); 6.58 (m, 1H); 7.16-7.29 (m, 5H) ; 7.73 (m, 2H) . Compound 147: 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-2-[2 thienyl])ethyl-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 81%. 'H NMR (300 15 MHz, CDC13) : d 1.88-2.41 (m, 6H) ; 2.72 (dm, 2H) ; 3.72 (m, 2H); 4.05 (m, 1H); 4.22 (m, 1H); 4.64 (m, 1H); 7.13-7.29 (m, 6H); 7.75 (dm, 1H); 8.05 (m, 1H). Compound 149: 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-2 20 phenyl)ethyl-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 99%. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC1): d 1.97-2.32 (m, 6H); 2.74 (t, 2H, .1 = 7.5); 3.57 (m, 2H) ; 4.24 (m, 2H) ; 4.67 (m, 1H) ; 6.95-7.28 (m, 5H); 7.51-7.64 (m, 3H) ; 8.03-8.09 (m, 2H) . 25 Compound 150: 3 - (2, 5 -dimethoxyphenyl) -1-propyl (2S) -1- (3, 3 dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidine- carboxylate, 99%. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) : d 0.87 (t, 3H) ; 1.22 (s, 3H) ; 1.26 (s, 3H); 1.69 (m, 2H); 1.96 (m, 5H); 2.24 (m, 1H); 2.68 (m, 2H); 3.55 (m, 2H); 3.75 (s, 3H); 3.77 (s, 3H); 4.17 (m, 2H); 30 4.53 (d, 1H) ; 6.72 (m, 3H) . Compound 151: 3-(2,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-1-prop-2-(E)-enyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidine carboxylate, 99%. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) : d 0.87 (t, 3H); 35 1.22 (s, 3H); 1.26 (s, 3H); 1.67 (m, 2H); 1.78 (m, 1H); 2.07 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 134 (m, 2H); 2.26 (m, 1H); 3.52 (m, 2H); 3.78 (s, 3H); 3.80 (s, 3H); 4.54 (m, 1H); 4.81 (m, 2H); 6.29 (dt, 1H, J = 15.9); 6.98 (s, 1H). 5 Compound 152: 2-(3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl)-1-ethyl (2S)-1 (3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidine- carboxylate, 97%. 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDC1 3 ): d 0.84 (t, 3H); 1.15 (s, 3H); 1.24 (s, 3H); 1.71 (dm, 2H); 1.98 (m, 5H); 2.24 (m, 1H); 2.63 (m, 2H); 3.51 (t, 2H); 3.79 (s, 3H); 3.83 (s, 3H); 4.14 (m, 10 2H); 4.52 (m, 1H); 6.36 (s, 2H). Compound 153: 3-(3-Pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl 1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 80%. 'H NMR (CDC1 3 , 300 MHz): d 0.85 (t, 3H) ; 1.23, 1.26 (s, 3H each); 15 1.63-1.89 (m, 2H); 1.90-2.30 (m, 4H) ; 2.30-2.50 (m, 1H) ; 2.72 (t, 2H); 3.53 (m, 2H); 4.19 (m, 2H); 4.53 (m, 1H); 7.22 (m, 1H); 7.53 (dd, 1H); 8.45. Compound 154: 3-(2-Pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl 20 1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 88%. 'H NMR (CDC1,, 300 MHz): d 0.84 (t, 3H); 1.22, 1.27 (s, 3H each); 1.68-2.32 (m, 8H); 2.88 (t, 2H, .= 7.5); 3.52 (m, 2H); 4.20 (m, 2H); 4.51 (m, 1H); 7.09-7.19 (m, 2H); 7.59 (m, 1H); 8.53 (d, 1H, J = 4.9) 25 Compound 155: 3-(4-Pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl 1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 91%. 'H NMR (CDCls, 300 MHz) : d 6.92-6.80 (m, 4H); 6.28 (m, 1H); 5.25 (d, 1H, = 5.7); 4.12 (m, 1H); 4.08 (s, 3H); 3.79 (s, 3H); 3.30 (m, 30 2H); 2.33 (m, 1H); 1.85-1.22 (m, 7H); 1.25 (s, 3H); 1.23 (s, 3H); 0.89 (t, 3H, J = 7.5). Compound 156: 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-cyclohexyl-1,2 dioxoethyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 91%. 'H NMR (CDC1 3 , 300 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 135 MHz) : d 1.09-1.33 (m, 5H); 1.62-2.33 (m, 12H); 2.69 (t, 2H, . = 7.5); 3.15 (dm, 1H); 3.68 (m, 2H); 4.16 (m, 2H); 4.53, 4.84 (d, 1H total); 7.19 (m, 3H); 7.29 (m, 2H). 5 Compound 157: 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S) -1- (2-tert-butyl-1,2 dioxoethyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 92%. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 , 300 MHz): d 1.29 (s, 9H); 1.94-2.03 (m, 5H); 2.21 (m, 1H); 2.69 (m, 2H); 3.50-3.52 (m, 2H); 4.16 (m, 2H); 4.53 (m, 1H); 7.19 (m, 3H) ; 7. 30 (m, 2H) 10 Compound 158: 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S) -1- (2-cyclohexyl- ethyl 1,2-dioxoethyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 97%. 'H NMR (CDC1, 300 MHz): d 0.88 (m, 2H); 1.16 (m, 4H); 1.43-1.51 (m, 2H); 1.67 (m, 5H); 1.94-2.01 (m, 6H); 2.66-2.87 (m, 4H); 3.62-3.77 15 (m, 2H); 4.15 (m, 2H); 4.86 (m, 1H); 7.17-7.32 (m, 5H). Compound 159: 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-cyclo hexylethyl-1,2-dioxoethyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 70%. 'H NMR (CDC1 3 , 300 MHz) : d 0.87 (m, 2H) ; 1.16 (m, 4H) ; 1.49 (m, 20 2H); 1.68 (m, 4H); 1.95-2.32 (m, 7H); 2.71 (m, 2H); 2.85 (m, 2H); 3.63-3.78 (m, 2H); 4.19 (m, 2H); 5.30 (m, 1H); 7.23 (m, 1H); 7.53 (m, 1H); 8.46 (m, 2H). Compound 160: 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-tert-butyl 25 1,2-dioxoethyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 83%. 'H NMR (CDC1 3 , 300 MHz): d 1.29 (s, 9H); 1.95-2.04 (m, 5H); 2.31 (m, 1H); 2.72 (t, 2H, J = 7.5); 3.52 (m, 2H); 4.18 (m, 2H); 4.52 (m, 1H); 7.19-7.25 (m, 1H); 7.53 (m, 1H); 8.46 (m, 2H). 30 Compound 161: 3,3-diphenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl 1,2-dioxopentyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 99%. 'H NMR (CDC1 3 , 300 MHz): d 0.85 (t, 3H); 1.21, 1.26 (s, 3H each); 1.68-2.04 (m, 5H); 2.31 (m, 1H); 2.40 (m, 2H); 3.51 (m, 2H); 4.08 (m, 3H); 4.52 (m, 1H); 7.18-7.31 (m, 10H). 35 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 136 Compound 162: 3-(3-pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-1- (2-cyclo- hexyl 1,2-dioxoethyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 88%. 'H NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz) : d 1.24-1.28 (m, 5H) ; 1.88-2.35 (m, 11H) ; 2.72 (t, 2H, J = 7.5); 3.00-3.33 (dm, 1H); 3.69 (m, 2H); 4.19 (m, 2H); 5 4.55 (m, 1H); 7.20-7.24 (m, 1H); 7.53 (m, 1H); 8.47 (m, 2H). Compound 163: 3-(3-Pyridyl)-1-propyl (2S)-N-([2-thienyl] glyoxyl)pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 49%. 'H NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): d 1.81-2.39 (m, 6H); 2.72 (dm, 2H); 3.73 (m, 2H); 4.21 (m, 10 2H); 4.95 (m, 1H); 7.19 (m, 2H); 7.61 (m, 1H); 7.80 (d, 1H); 8.04 (d, 1H); 8.46 (m, 2H). Compound 164: 3,3-Diphenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl 1,2-dioxobutyl)-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 99%. 'H NMR (CDC13, 15 300 MHz): d 1.27 (s, 9H); 1.96 (m, 2H); 2.44 (m, 4H); 3.49 (m, 1H); 3.64 (m, 1H); 4.08 (m, 4H); 4.53 (dd, 1H); 7.24 (m, 10H). Compound 165: 3,3-Diphenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-cyclohexyl 20 glyoxyl-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 91%. 'H NMR (CDC1, 300 MHz): d 1.32 (m, 6H) ; 1.54-2.41 (m, 10H) ; 3.20 (dm, 1H); 3.69 (m, 2H); 4.12 (m, 4H); 4.52 (d, 1H); 7.28 (m, 10H). Compound 166: 3,3-Diphenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(2-thienyl) 25 glyoxyl-2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate, 75%. 'H NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz): d 2.04 (m, 3H); 2.26 (m, 2H); 2.48 (m, 1H); 3.70 (m, 2H); 3.82-4.18 (m, 3H total); 4.64 (m, 1H); 7.25 (m, 11H); 7.76 (dd, 1H) ; 8.03 (m, 1H). 30 Example 16 General procedure for the synthesis of acrylic esters, exemplified for methyl (3,3,5-trimethoxy)-trans-cinnamate. A solution of 3,4,5-trimethoxybenzaldehyde (5.0 g; 25.48 mmol) and methyl (triphenyl- phosphoranylidene)acetate (10.0 35 g; 29.91 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (250 mL) was refluxed SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 137 overnight. After cooling, the reaction mixture was diluted with 200 mL of ethyl acetate and washed with 2 x 200 mL of water, dried, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was chromatographed on a silica gel column, eluting with 25% 5 ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 5.63 g (88%) of the cinnamate as a white crystalline solid. 'H NMR (300 Mhz; CDCl 3 ) : d 3.78 (s, 3H) ; 3.85 (s, 6H) ; 6.32 (d, 1H, J = 16); 6.72 (s, 2H) ; 7.59 (d, 1H, J = 16) . 10 Example 17 General procedure for the synthesis of saturated alcohols from acrylic esters, exemplified for (3,4,5 trimethoxy) phenylpropanol. A solution of methyl (3,3,5-trimethoxy)-trans-cinnamate 15 (1.81 g; 7.17 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (30 mL) was added in a dropwise manner to a solution of lithium aluminum hydride (14 mmol) in THF (35 mL), with stirring and under an argon atmosphere. After the addition was complete, the mixture was heated to 75 0 C for 4 hours. After cooling, it was quenched 20 by the careful addition of 15 mL of 2 N NaOH followed by 50 mL of water. The resulting mixture was filtered through Celite to remove solids, and the filter cake was washed with ethyl acetate. The combined organic fractions were washed with water, dried, concentrated in vacuo, and purified on a 25 silica gel column, eluting with ethyl acetate to obtain 0.86 g (53%) of the alcohol as a clear oil. 'H NMR (300 Mhz; CDCl 3 ) : d 1.23 (br, 1H) ; 1.87 (m, 2H) ; 2.61 (t, 2H, J = 7.1) 3.66 (t, 2H) ; 3.80 (s, 3H) ; 3.83 (s, 6H) ; 6.40 (s, 2H) 30 Example 18 General procedure for the synthesis of trans-allylic alcohols from acrylic esters, exemplified for (3,4,5 trimethoxy)phenylprop-2-(E)-enol. A solution of methyl (3,3,5-trimethoxy)-trans-cinnamate 35 (1.35 g; 5.35 mmol) in toluene (25 mL) was cooled to -10 0 C SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 138 and treated with a solution of diisobutylaluminum hydride in toluene (11.25 mL of a 1.0 M solution; 11.25 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours at 0 0 C and then quenched with 3 mL of methanol followed by 1 N HCl until the 5 pH was 1. The reaction mixture was extracted into ethyl acetate and the organic phase was washed with water, dried and concentrated. Purification on a silica gel column eluting with 25% ethyl acetate in hexane furnished 0.96 g (80%) of a thick oil. 'H NMR (360 Mhz; CDCl 3 ): d 3.85 (s, 10 3H) ; 3.87 (s, 6H) ; 4.32 (d, 2H, J = 5.6) ; 6.29 (dt, 1H, .= 15.8, 5.7) , 6.54 (d, 1H, . = 15.8) ; 6.61 (s, 2H) Example 19 Synthesis of 3-phenyl-1-propyl (2S)-1-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2 15 dioxopentyl)-2--pyrrolidinecarboxylate (1) Methyl (2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl)-2 pyrrolidinecarboxylate A solution of L-proline methyl ester hydrochloride (3.08 g; 18.60 mmol) in dry methylene chloride was cooled to 0 0 C 20 and treated with triethylamine (3.92 g; 38.74 mmol; 2.1 eq). After stirring the formed slurry under a nitrogen atmosphere for 15 min, a solution of methyl oxalyl chloride (3.20 g; 26.12 mmol) in methylene chloride (45 ml) was added dropwise. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 1.5 hour. After 25 filtering to remove solids, the organic phase was washed with water, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated. The crude residue was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 50% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 3.52 g (88%) of the product as a reddish oil. Mixture of cis-trans amide rotamers; data for 30 trans rotamer given. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ) : d 1. 93 (dm, 2H) ; 2.17 (m, 2H) ; 3.62 (m, 2H); 3.71 (s, 3H) ; 3.79, 3.84 (s, 3H total) ; 4.86 (dd, 1H, J 8.4, 3.3) . Methyl (2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl)-2 pyrrolidinecarboxylate 35 A solution of methyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-2-methoxyethyl) SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 139 2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate (2.35 g; 10.90 mmol) in 30 ml of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was cooled to -78 0 C and treated with 14.2 ml of a 1.0 M solution of 1,1-dimethylpropylmagnesium chloride in THF. After stirring the resulting homogeneous 5 mixture at -78 0 C for three hours, the mixture was poured into saturated ammonium chloride (100 ml) and extracted into ethyl acetate. The organic phase was washed with water, dried, and concentrated, and the crude material obtained upon removal of the solvent was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with 10 25% ethyl acetate in hexane, to obtain 2.10 g (75%) of the oxamate as a colorless oil. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ) : d 0.88 (t, 3H); 1.22, 1.26 (s, 3H each); 1.75 (dm, 2H); 1.87-2.10 (m, 3H); 2.23 (m, 1H); 3.54 (m, 2H); 3.76 (s, 3H); 4.52 (dm, 1H, i = 8.4, 3.4). 15 Synthesis of (2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethvlpentvl)-2 pyrrolidinecarboxylic acid A mixture of methyl (2S)-1-(1,2-dioxo-3,3 dimethylpentyl) -2-pyrrolidinecarboxylate (2.10 g; 8.23 mmol) , 1 N LiOH (15 ml), and methanol (50 ml) was stirred at 0 0 C for 20 30 minutes and at room temperature overnight. The mixture was acidified to pH 1 with 1 N HCl, diluted with water, and extracted into 100 ml of methylene chloride. The organic extract was washed with brine and concentrated to deliver 1.73 g (87%) of snow-white solid which did not require 25 further purification. 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ) : d 0.87 (t, 3H) ; 1.22, 1.25 (s, 3H each) ; 1.77 (dm, 2H) ; 2.02 (m, 2H) ; 2.17 (m, 1H) 2.25 (m, 1H); 3.53 (dd, 2H, J 10.4, 7.3); 4.55 (dd, 1H, J = 8.6, 4.1). 3-Phenyl-l-propyl (2S)-l-(3,3-dimethyl-1,2-dioxopentyl)-2 30 pyrrolidinecarboxylate (1) A mixture of (2S)-l-(1,2-dioxo-3,3-dimethylpentyl)-2 pyrrolidine-carboxylic acid (600 mg; 2.49 mmol), 3-phenyl-l propanol (508 mg; 3.73 mmol), dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (822 mg; 3.98 mmol), camphorsulfonic acid (190 mg; 0.8 mmol) and 35 4-dimethylaminopyridine (100 mg; 0.8 mmol) in methylene SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 140 chloride (20 ml) was stirred overnight under a nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite to remove solids and concentrated in vacuo, and the crude material was purified on a flash column (25% ethyl acetate in 5 hexane) to obtain 720 mg (80%) of Example 1 as a colorless oil. 'H NMR (CDCl,): d 0.84 (t, 3H) ; 1.19 (s, 3H) ; 1.23 (s, 3H) ; 1. 70 (dm, 2H) ; 1. 98 (m, 5H) ; 2.22 (m, 1H) ; 2. 64 (m, 2H) ; 3.47 (m, 2H); 4.14 (m, 2H); 4.51 (d, 1H); 7.16 (m, 3H); 7.26 (m, 2H). 10 Figure 1. GPI 1046 protects retinal ganglion cells against degeneration following retinal ischemia. Retinal ganglion cells were retrogradely labeled in adult rats by bilateral injection of fluorogold in their lateral 15 geniculate nuclei. Labeled ganglion cells in the normal rat retina appear as white profiles against the dark background (Figure 1A) . Complete retinal ischemia was produced by infusing normal saline solution into the retinal vitreous cavity of each eye until the intraocular pressure exceeded 20 arterial blood pressure. 28 days after the ischemic episode extensive degeneration of retinal ganglion cell was evidenced by massive reduction in the density of fluorogold labeled cells (Figure 1B) . Administration of GPI 1046 (10mg/kg, s.c.) 1 hour prior to the ischemic episode and at 10mg/kg/day 25 for the next four days produced noticeable protection of a large proportion of the vulnerable ganglion cell population (Figure 1C). Figure 2. GPI 1046 prevents degeneration of optic nerve axons 30 and myelin following retinal ischemia Examination of the optic nerves from the same retinal ischemia cases reveals that GPI 1046 produces dramatic protection of optic nerve element from ischemic degeneration. Toluidine blue staining of epon embedded optic nerve cross 35 sections revealed the detail of myelin sheaths (white SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 141 circles) and optic nerve axons (black centers) in the normal rat optic nerve. Optic nerves from vehicle treated cases examined 28 days after a 1 hour retinal ischemic episode are characterized by a decreased density of optic nerve axons and 5 the appearance of numerous degenerating myelin figures (bright white filled circles) . Treatment with GPI 1046 protected the majority of optic nerve axons from degeneration and also dramatically decreased the density of degenerating myelin figures. 10 Figure 3. GPI 1046 provides moderate protection against retinal ganglion cell death after optic nerve transection Complete transection of the optic nerve 5 mm from the eyeball produces massive degeneration of retinal ganglion cells, 15 representing loss of >87% of the normal ganglion cell population 90 days after the injury (Table 1). Few spared fluorogold pre labeled ganglion cells are present in vehicle treated cases (large white figures) among a population of small microglia that digest the debris of the degenerating 20 cells and take up the fluorogold label (Figure 3A). Treatment with GPI 1046 for 14 days resulted in a small but not significant increase in the density of retinal ganglion cells that survived 90 days after transection (Table 1) but treatment with GPI 1046 for the first 28 days after 25 transection produced moderate but significant protection of 12.6% of the vulnerable ganglion cell population (Table 1, Figure 3B). Figure 4. GPI 1046 treatment duration significantly affects 30 the process of optic nerve axonal degeneration after transection. Examination of optic nerve axon density in the proximal stump of the optic nerve from the same cases revealed a more dramatic protection afforded by GPI 1046 treatment. 90 days SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 142 after transection few ganglion cell axons remain within the optic nerve (Figure 4B), representing only 5.6% of the normal population. The loss of axons reflects both the death of retinal ganglion cells and the regression or "dying back" of 5 the axons of - 70% of the small surviving ganglion cell population into the retina itself (Table 1). Treatment with GPI 1046 for the first 14 days after optic nerve transection produced a small but significant 5.3% protection of optic nerve axons (Figure 4D, Table 1) , but treatment with the same 10 dose of GPI 1046 for 28 days resulted in the protection of optic nerve axons for the vast majority (81.4%) of spared retinal ganglion cells (Figure 4C, Table 1). Figure 5. GPI 1046 treatment produces a greater effect on 15 optic nerve axons than ganglion cell bodies This summary figure shows data from Figure 3 ganglion cell protection and higher power photomicrographs of optic nerve axon protection (Figure 5A&B, upper panels). 28 day treatment with GPI 1046 produced a significant increase in 20 the density of large, and particularly medium and small caliber optic nerve axons (Figure 5C&D, lower panels). Figure 6. GPI 1046 treatment for 28 days after optic nerve transection prevents myelin degeneration in the proximal 25 stump Myelin basic protein immunohistochemistry labels fascicles (darker labeled 'islands') of myelinated axons in the normal optic nerve (Figure 6A, upper left) . 90 days after transection extensive degeneration of myelin is evident in 30 vehicle treated cases, characterized by the loss of fascicular organization and the appearance of numerous large dense degenerating myelin figures (Figure 6B, upper right). Treatment with GPI 1046 for the first 14 days after optic nerve transection did not alter the pattern of myelin 35 degeneration (Figure 6C, lower left panel), and yielded an SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 143 insignificant 1.6% quantitative recovery in myelin density (Table 1). Extending the GPI 1046 treatment course through the first 28 days after optic nerve transection produced a dramatic preservation of the fascicular staining pattern for 5 myelin basic protein in the proximal stump of the optic nerve and decreased the density of degenerating myelin figures (Figure 6D, lower right panel), representing a '70% recovery of myelin density (Table 1). 10 Figure 7. FKBP-12 immunohistochemistry labels oligodendroglia (large dark cells with fibrous processes), the cells which produce myelin, located between the fascicles of optic nerve fibers, and also some optic nerve axons. 15 Figure 8. GPI 1046 treatment for 28 days after optic nerve transection prevents myelin degeneration in the distal stump. Complete transection of the optic nerve leads to degeneration of the distal segments (axon fragments disconnected from the ganglion cell bodies), and the degeneration of their myelin 20 sheaths. 90 days after transection (Figure 8B) myelin basic protein immunohistochemistry reveals the near total loss of fascicular organization (present in the normal optic nerve, Figure 8A) and the presence of numerous dense degenerating myelin figures. Quantitation reveals that the cross 25 sectional area of the transected distal stump shrinks by 31% and loses approximately 1/2 of its myelin (Table 1). Treatment with GPI 1046 for the first 14 days after transection did not protect against shrinkage of the distal stump but did slightly increase the density of myelin, though 30 the density of degenerating myelin figures remained high (Figure 8C, Table 1). GPI 1046 treatment through the first 28 days produced dramatic protection of the fascicular pattern of myelin labeling, decreased the density of degenerating myelin figures, prevented cross sectional SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 144 shrinkage of the distal stump of the transected nerve and maintained the myelin levels at -99% of normal levels (Figure 8D, Table 1). 5 Figure 9. 28 day treatment with GPI 1046 treatment beginning 8 weeks after onset of streptozotocin induced diabetes decreases the extent of neovascularization in the inner and outer retina and protects neurons in the inner nuclear layer (INL) and ganglion cell layer (GCL) from degeneration. 10 Negative images of cresyl violet stained tangential retinal sections reveals perikarya in the three cellular layers (Figure 9A). The retinae of streptozotocin treated animals administered only vehicle (Figure 9B) exhibited loss of cells from the ONL and INL, decreased thickness of the Outer 15 plexiform layer (the dark area between ONL and INL) and a dramatic increase in the size and density of retinal blood vessels (large black circular outlines) in the INL, OPL, ONL and the photoreceptor layer (PR, the gray fuzzy area above the ONL). GPI 1046 treatment reduced neovascularization 20 (i.e. prevented the proliferation of blood vessels) in the PR, ONL, OPL and INL. Although GPI 1046 did not appear to protect against neuronal loss in the ONL, it appeared to decrease the loss of neurons in both the INL and GCL compared to streptozotocin/vehicle treated controls. 25 Example 20 In Vivo Retinal Ganglion Cell and Optic Nerve Axon Tests The extent of degeneration reduction or prevention in 30 retinal ganglion cells and optic nerve axons was determined in a vision loss model utilizing surgical optic nerve transection to simulate mechanical damage to the optic nerve. The effects of several neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligands on retinal ganglion cells neuroprotection and optic nerve axon SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 145 density was determined experimentally, comparing 14 day and 28 day neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand treatments. The effects of treatment with neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligands on retinal ganglion cells and optic nerve axons was correlated. 5 Surgical Procedures Adult male Sprague Dawley rats (3 months old, 225-250 grams) were anesthetized with a ketamine (87mg/kg) and xylazine (13mg/kg) mixture. Retinal ganglion cells were pre labeled by bilateral stereotaxic injection of the fluorescent 10 retrogradely transported marker fluoro-gold (FG, 0.5 microliters of 2.5% solution in saline) at the coordinates of the LGNd (4.5 millimeters post 3, 3.5 millimeters lateral, 4.6 millimeters below dura). Four days later, FG labeled rats underwent a second surgery for microsurgical bilateral 15 intraorbital optic nerve transection 4-5 millimeters behind the orbit. Experimental animals were divided into six experimental groups of six rats (12 eyes) per group. One group received a neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand (10 milligrams per kg per day 20 sc in PEG vehicle (20 percent propylene glycol, 20 percent ethanol, and 60 percent saline)) for 14 days. A second group received the same neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand dose for 28 days. Each treated group had a corresponding sham/surgery and transection control group which received corresponding 14 25 or 28 day dosing with the vehicle only. All animals were sacrificed 90 days after optic nerve transection and perfused pericardially with formalin. All eyes and optic nerves stumps were removed. Cases were excluded from the study if the optic nerve vasculature was 30 damaged or if FG labeling was absent in the retina. Retinal Ganglion Cell Counts Retinas were removed from eyes and prepared for wholemount analysis. For each group, five eyes with dense and intense FG labeling were selected for quantitative 35 analysis using a 20 power objective. Digital images were SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 146 obtained from five fields in the central retina (3-4 millimeters radial to optic nerve head). FG labeled Large (>18 Am), medium (12-16 pm), and small (<10 Am) ganglion cells and microglia were counted in five 400 pm by 400 pm 5 fields per case, 5 cases per group. Examination of Optic Nerves Proximal and distal optic nerve stumps were identified, measured, and transferred to 30% sucrose saline. The proximal stumps of five nerves were blocked and affixed to a 10 chuck, and 10 micron cross sections were cut on a cryostat; one in ten sections were saved per set. Sections including the region 1-2 mm behind the orbit were reacted for RT97 neurofilament immunohistochemistry. Analysis of optic nerve axon density was performed using a 63 power oil immersion 15 lens, a Dage 81 camera, and the Simple Image Analysis program. RT97 positive optic nerve axons were counted in three 200 pm by 200 pm fields per nerve. The area of the nerve was also determined for each case at 10 power. As depicted graphically in Table I & II, the 14 day 20 course of treatment with a neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand provided moderate neuroprotection of retinal ganglion cells observed 28 days after optic nerve transection. However, by 90 days after transection, only 5% of the ganglion cell population remained viable. 25 90 days after optic nerve transection the number of axons persisting in the proximal stump of the optic nerve represented approximately one half of the number of surviving ganglion cells in groups of animals that received vehicle alone or the 14 day course of treatment with a 30 neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand. These results indicate that over half of the transected ganglion cell axons retract beyond the optic nerve head, and that treatment with a neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand during the first 14 days after optic nerve transection is not sufficient to arrest this 35 retraction. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 147 As depicted graphically in Table I & II, more prolonged treatment with a neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligand during the 28 day course of treatment produced a moderate increase in retinal ganglion cell neuroprotection. Approximately 12% of 5 the vulnerable retinal ganglion cell population was protected. A similar proportion (~50%) of optic nerve axon density sparing was also observed. These results demonstate the startling result that extending the duration of treatment with a neuroimmunophilin FKBP ligands to 28 days after 10 transection completely arrests the regression of damaged axons for essentially the entire surviving population of retinal ganglion cells. Additional results are set forth in Tables III and IV. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/1 8241 148 V) C)C) ff) -kl 00 -0 0jC 00
C.
Cd X) E C> z LCC C C)Cl O O E C)) 0 0 > 0 0> g)0 ~ -E 0cc r- 7 000 C.) 0 00 0 0 E -C 00 0 0 0 C) 00 M0i
-
00r-0 +1 +1 +1 + w ") 6.
E
ON 0 + + . =L E N- E 00 _ _ _ 00 r- =i. C 10 SUSITT SHE (UE6 WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 149 Table II Neuroprotective effect of GPI 1046 on retinal ganglion cells following optic nerve transection 400 -o 300- 8 200 Cu C 100 0 Sham ONT / Veh ONT / 14d ONT / 28d GPI 1046 GPI 1046 SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/1 8241 150 C C 0 0 C00 =~ :z z c,00
-
CU cm a)C) C ~0 a)) _ 0 00 C,4 0 cl0 LO Ca)a C Ca) cu _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ C ), - C)C)C)C C) ) IC6 0 a)ed % SOV AJN !d SUBSTTUTESHEE (RUE 26 WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/1 8241 w~ ca CD cm E E 0o CD F- F 0 00 C-)) 0 0 C1 a)) 0 i -- o CfE C.0 0 CD S co CN PjIj / SUOXV GAJON oildO + L.6 ±il SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 152 Example 21 A patient is suffering from macular degeneration. A derivative as identified above, alone or in combination with one or more other neopsic factors, or a pharmaceutical 5 composition comprising the same, may be administered to the patient. A reduction in vision loss, prevention of vision degeneration, and/or promotion of vision regeneration are/is expected to occur following treatment. 10 Example 22 A patient is suffering from glaucoma, resulting in cupping of the optic nerve disc and damage to nerve fibers. A derivative as identified above, alone or in combination with one or more other neopsic factors, or a pharmaceutical 15 composition comprising the same, may be administered to the patient. A reduction in vision loss, prevention of vision degeneration, and/or promotion of vision regeneration are/is expected to occur following treatment. 20 Example 23 A patient is suffering from cataracts requiring surgery. Following surgery, a derivative as identified above, alone or in combination with one or more other neopsic factors, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising the same, may be 25 administered to the patient. A reduction in vision loss, prevention of vision degeneration, and/or promotion of vision regeneration are/is expected to occur following treatment. Example 24 30 A patient is suffering from an impairment or blockage of retinal blood supply relating to diabetic retinopathy, ischemic optic neuropathy, or retinal artery or vein blockage. A derivative as identified above, alone or in combination with one or more other neopsic factors, or a 35 pharmaceutical composition comprising the same, may be SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 153 administered to the patient. A reduction in vision loss, prevention of vision degeneration, and/or promotion of vision regeneration are/is expected to occur following treatment. 5 Example 25 A patient is suffering from a detached retina. A derivative as identified above, alone or in combination with one or more other neopsic factors, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising the same, may be administered to the 10 patient. A reduction in vision loss, prevention of vision degeneration, and/or promotion of vision regeneration are/is expected to occur following treatment. Example 26 15 A patient is suffering from tissue damage caused by inflammation associated with uveitis or conjunctivitis. A derivative as identified above, alone or in combination with one or more other neopsic factors, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising the same, may be administered to the 20 patient. A reduction in vision loss, prevention of vision degeneration, and/or promotion of vision regeneration are/is expected to occur following treatment. Example 27 25 A patient is suffering from photoreceptor damage caused by chronic or acute exposure to ultraviolet light. A derivative as identified above, alone or in combination with one or more other neopsic factors, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising the same, may be administered to the 30 patient. A reduction in vision loss, prevention of vision degeneration, and/or promotion of vision regeneration are/is expected to occur following treatment. Example 28 35 A patient is suffering from optic neuritis. A SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 154 derivative as identified above, alone or in combination with one or more other neopsic factors, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising the same, may be administered to the patient. A reduction in vision loss, prevention of vision 5 degeneration, and/or promotion of vision regeneration are/is expected to occur following treatment. Example 29 A patient is suffering from tissue damage associated 10 with a "dry eye" disorder. A derivative as identified above, alone or in combination with one or more other neopsic factors, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising the same, may be administered to the patient. A reduction in vision loss, prevention of vision degeneration, and/or promotion of 15 vision regeneration are/is expected to occur following treatment. Example 30 Efficacy of representative compounds from different 20 immunophilin ligand series in protecting retinal ganglion cell axons from degeneration following optic nerve transection is set forth in Table V. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 155 Table V Efficacy of representative compounds from different immunophilin ligand series in protecting retinal ganglion cell axons from 5 degeneration following optic nerve transection RT97+RGC axon density 14 days after ON transection 10 (% ON axons Compound Structure Comments rescued) Adamantyl s Thioester of urea 100.0% B HN" O 0 Ki rotamase= 149 nM ±5.2% SEM Clearance=? pLl/min. 15 N Ester A Ki rotamase=7.5 nM 60.5% GPI 1046 0 0 Clearance=63.8 1i/min. ±3.9SEM Sulfonamide N Ki rotamase=107 nM 60.4% 20 C Clearance=3 1.1 pl/min. ±3.1% SEM Pipecolic sulfonamide Ki rotamase= nM 58.4% D 0= Clearance= ptl/min. ±6.4% SEM Ester of pipecolic acid 25 N Ki rotamase=20 nM 56.6% E o 0 Clearance=41.8 pil/min. ±9.4% SEM N Proline heterocycle o Analog of GPI 1046 55.1% F N Ki rotamase=272 nM ±5.9% SEM 0 o Clearance=? pl/min. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 156 TABLE V continued RT97+RGC axon density 14 days after ON transection 5 (% ON axons Compound Structure Comments rescued) Pipecolic acid N OH dimethyl ketone 34.0% G 0 Ki rotamase>10,000 nM ±4.8% SEM Clearance=? ptl/min. 10 N NH 2 Ki rotamase= nM 30.3% H 0 0 Clearance= ? pl/min. ±8.0% SEM Ester of Thiourea SKi rotamase=131 nM 23.8% 15 I HN kS O Clearance=8.0 tl/min. ±5.3 SEM N Ketone I analog of GPI 1046 15.8% J N Ki rotamase=210 nM ±4.8% SEM o o Clearance=1.5 pl/min. Pipecolic acid Thioester 20 N 7 Ki rotamase=86 nM 13.0% K o Clearance=4.5 pl/min. ±4.2% SEM Prolyl acid L OH Ki rotamase= >7743 nM 7.8% 0 Clearance=5.2 pd/min. ±3.0% SEM Thioester 25 N Ki rotamase=7 nM -6.3% M 0 o Clearance=12.5 pl/min. +3.9% SEM SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 157 TABLE V continued RT97+RGC axon density 14 days after ON transection (% ON axons Compound Structure Comments rescued) Ki rotamase=722 nM N Clearance=21.9 ptl/min. s H3C'N O N 0 5 Example 31 THE FKBP NEUROIMMUNOPHILIN LIGAND GPI-1046 ENHANCES RETINAL GANGLION CELL SURVIVAL AND ARRESTS AXONAL DYING BACK 10 FOLLOWING OPTIC NERVE TRANSECTION Transection of the mammalian optic nerve results in a brief period of abortive regeneration, but the majority of axotomized neurons die and the axons from many persisting 15 ganglion cells die back beyond the optic nerve head. The present Example was designed to examine the neuroprotective effects of GPI-1046 following optic nerve transection. Retinal ganglion cells in adult male Sprague Dawley rats were retrogradely labeled by fluorogold injection in the LGNd 20 and four days later the optic nerves were transected 5 mm behind the globe. Groups of animals received either GPI-1046 10mg/kg/day s.c. or vehicle for 28 days. All experimental animals and controls were sacrificed 90 days after transection. 25 By 90 days only - 10% of the FG labeled ganglion cell population survived but less than half of these neurons maintained axons that extended past the optic nerve head, as detected with RT97 neurofilament immunohistochemisty. GPI 1046 treatment produced a moderate degree of perikaryal SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCTIUS99/18241 158 neuroprotection, sparing 25% of the ganglion cell population, and preserved the axons of virtually all protected neurons in the proximal stump of the transected nerve. These results indicate that treatment with the FKBP neuroimmunophilin 5 ligand GPI-1046 produces a fundamental alteration in the pathological process following injury to CNS tracts. These results also demonstrate that the small molecule FKBP neuroimmunophilin ligand GPI 1046 enhances neurite outgrowth in culture, enhance peripheral nerve regeneration, 10 and stimulate sprouting within the CNS following partial deafferentation. Example 32 15 NEUROIMMUNOPHILIN LIGANDS PROMOTE RECOVERY FROM THE PERIPHERAL SENSORY NEUROPATHY ASSOCIATED WITH STREPTOZOTOCIN-INDUCED DIABETES Peripheral neuropathy is a common debilitating 20 complication of Type 2 diabetes in some 30-40% of diabetic patients. Neurotrophic factors such as nerve growth factor (NGF) are known to promote survival of developing and adult neurons of the peripheral nervous system (PNS) , and have also been evaluated as treatments for diabetic peripheral 25 neuropathy. Some of the selective ligands of the neuroimmunophilin FKBP-12 such as the small molecule GPI 1046, have also been shown to promote repair and regeneration in the central and peripheral nervous systems (Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 94, 2019-2024, 1997). 30 In this Example the potential therapeutic effects of GPI-1046 were evaluated for its ability to improve sensory function in the streptozotocin-induced diabetic rat. The procedure involved using Male Wistar rats which were given a single injection of streptozotocin (65 mg/kg i.v.). Blood 35 glucose levels were determined weekly for the first three weeks and on the last week of the experiment. Animals were SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 159 evaluated weekly for signs of sensory neuropathy using the conventional hot plate and tail flick apparatus test procedures. After six weeks, treatment either with GPI-1046 or vehicle was initiated. 5 The results demonstrated that behavioral testing using the hot plate and the tail flick apparatus indicated improvement in latency in lesioned animals treated for 6 weeks with GPI-1046 at 10 mg/kg s.c. The results also showed that GPI-1046 ameliorates the behavioral sequelae of diabetic 10 sensory neuropathy and may offer some relief for patients suffering from diabetic peripheral neuropathy. Morris Watermaze/Aging and Memory Test Procedure Aged rodents exhibit marked individual differences in 15 performance on a variety of behavioral tasks, including two choice spatial discrimination in a modified T-maze, spatial discrimination in a circular platform task, passive avoidance, radial maze tasks, and spatial navigation in a water pool. 20 In all of these tasks, a proportion of aged rats or mice perform as well as the vast majority of young control animals, while other animals display severe impairments in memory function compared to young animals. For example, Fischer and colleagues showed that the proportion of rats 25 displaying significant impairments in spatial navigation increases with age, (Fischer et al. 1991b) with 8% of all 12 month old, 45% of 18 month old, 53% of 24 month old, and 90% of all 30 month old rats displaying impairments in spatial acquisition of the Morris watermaze task relative to young 30 controls. Specifically, rodent spatial learning and memory decline during aging has been accepted by many investigators as an intriguing correlative animal model of human senile dementia. Cholinergic function in the hippocampus has been extensively 35 studied as a component of spatial learning in rodents, and SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 160 declining hippocampal cholinergic function has been noted in parallel with the development of learning and memory impairments. In addition, other neurotransmitter systems have been shown to contribute to spatial learning, and to 5 decline with age, such as the dopaminergic and noradrenergic, serotonergic, and glutamatergic systems. Also, reports on age-related deficits of hippocampal long-term potentiation (LTP) -induction, a reduction in theta rhythm frequency, a loss of experience-dependent plasticity 10 of hippocampal place-units, and reductions in hippocampal protein kinase C are in keeping with the concept that no single underlying pathology can be identified as the cause of age-related behavioral impairment in rodents. However, the various experimental therapeutic approaches that have been 15 undertaken to improve memory function in aged rodents have been somewhat slanted towards the cholinergic hypothesis. The Morris watermaze is widely used for assessing spatial memory formation and retention in experimental animals. The test depends on the animal's ability to utilize 20 spatial visual information in order to locate a submerged escape platform in a water tank. It is important that the tank itself be as devoid of specific visual features as possible - thus, it is always circular in shape, the sides are kept smooth and in uniform dull colors, and the water is 25 rendered opaque with nontoxic watercolour pigment or powdered milk. This is to ensure that the animal navigates only by the use of more distant visual cues, or by the use of intra maze cues specifically provided by the experimenter. The tank is filled to a level which forces the animal to 30 swim actively. Normal mice and rats react aversively to the swimming part of the test and will climb onto, and remain on, an escape platform from which they are removed to a heated resting cage. If the platform is visible (i.e. above the surface), 35 animals placed in the tank will quickly learn to home in on SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 161 the platform and climb out onto it. Testing with a visible platform will also ensure that the experimental animals are not blind and show sufficient motivation and stamina to perform the task, which can be important in experiments 5 involving aged rodents. If the platform is invisible (i.e. submerged just below the surface), normal animals learn to use distant visual cues in the test room for orientation in the test tank, and, when placed in the tank, will quickly home in on the approximate location of the platform and 10 circle in that area until the platform is found. The animals' path, speed, and swim time are tracked with a ceiling camera for later computerized analysis. Over the course of several successive trials, spatial learning can therefore be defined as a drop of distance swum, or time 15 elapsed, from placement in the tank until escape onto the invisible platform. The test can be adapted to assess several aspects of spatial memory: a) acquisition of a cued task, where the animal's ability to link one visual cue directly with the 20 escape platform depends on cortical function (i.e. a ball is suspended over the escape platform and the animal learns to follow this cue to find the platform); b) acquisition of a spatial task, where the animal's ability to learn the location of a submerged escape platform based on a 25 combination of distant visual cues is dependent upon hippocampal function (i.e. the animal learns to triangulate its position in the tank by visually aligning the paper-tower dispenser with the door and ceiling lamp); c) retention of a successfully acquired spatial task, which is predominantly 30 dependant on cortical function (i.e. the animal must remember the spatial location of the platform over several weeks); d) a hippocampus-dependant reversal task where the animals must reacquire a new spatial platform location (i.e. the platform is moved to a new location between swim trials and the animal 35 must abandon its previous search strategy and acquire a new SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 162 one) These different modifications of the Morris watermaze procedure can be applied in sequence to the same set of experimental animals and allow for a thorough 5 characterization of their spatial memory performance and its decline with normal ageing. Moreover, such a series of sequential memory tests sheds some light on the functional integrity of the specific brain systems involved in the acquisition and retention of spatial memory (e.g. rats with 10 cholinergic lesions of the hippocampus may remember a platform location acquired weeks before, but persevere over the old platform location after the platform is moved). Example 33 15 EFFECTS OF CHRONIC GPI-1046 ADMINISTRATION ON SPATIAL LEARNING AND MEMORY IN AGED RODENTS This Example shows the effects of chronic treatment with the systemically available FKBP-ligand GPI-1046 on spatial 20 learning and memory in aged rodents. The procedure involved using three-month old (young) and 18-19 month old male C57BL/6N-Nia (aged) mice which habituated to the well known and conventional Morris watermaze during a 4 trials/day, 3-4 day visible platform 25 training phase. Subsequent spatial acquisition testing was conducting as follows: All mice were given 4 trials/day (block), for 5 days. Maximum swim time was 90 seconds. Aged mice were allocated to an "aged impaired" group if their performance during blocks 4 or 5 of the acquisition phase was 30 >1 S.D. above the mean of "young" mice, and to an "aged non impaired" group if their performance was < 0.5 S.D. above the mean of "young" mice. Aged groups were then split into statistically similar "GPI-1046" and "vehicle" groups. Daily treatment with 10mg/kg GPI-1046 was initiated 3 35 days after the end of acquisition training, and continued SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO 00/09108 PCT/US99/18241 163 through retention testing. Retention testing began after 3 weeks of dosing using the same methods as the acquisition phase. Swim Distances (cm) were analyzed in a 7 X 5 ANOVA including Groups and Blocks (1-5) as factors in the analysis, 5 treating Blocks as a repeated measure. The results showed that planned contrasts revealed that there were significant differences between the "young", and "aged impaired-vehicle and GPI-1046" treated groups at the end of the acquisition phase, F 1 ., = 26.75, P=0.0001, and 10 F 1 58 = 17.70, P=0.0001 respectively. While there were no significant differences between the two "aged impaired" groups, F 1
.
5 = 0.67, P = 0.42. During retention testing, however, "aged impaired-vehicle" treated animals performed significantly poorer than "aged impaired - GPI-1046", and 15 "young" animals, F 1 69 = 8.11, P = 0.006, and F,6 9 = 25.45, P = 0.0001 respectively. There was no longer any statistically significant difference between the "young" and "aged impaired" - GPI-1046" treated groups during the retention phase, F,6 9 = 3.09, P = 0.08. In summary, systemic 20 treatment with GPI-1046 significantly enhanced spatial memory performance of mice with age-related spatial memory impairments. The invention being thus described, it will be obvious that the same may be varied in many ways. Such variations 25 are not to be regarded as a departure from the spirit and scope of the invention and all such modifications are intended to be included within the scope of the following claims. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

Claims (4)

1. A method for treating a vision disorder, improving 5 vision, treating memory impairment or enhancing memory performance in an animal, which comprises administering to said animal an effective amount of a non-immunosuppressive FKBP neuroimmunophilin ligand. 10
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the FKBP neuroimmunophilin is FKBP-12.
3. A pharmaceutical composition for treating a vision disorder, improving vision, treating memory impairment or 15 enhancing memory performance in an animal, comprising: a) an effective amount for treating a vision disorder, improving vision, treating memory impairment or enhancing memory performance in an animal of a non immunosuppressive FKBP neuroimmunophilin ligand; and 20 b) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
4. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 3, wherein the FKBP neuroimmunophilin is FKBP-12. SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
AU55556/99A 1998-08-14 1999-08-12 Compositions and uses for vision and memory disorders Abandoned AU5555699A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13442298A 1998-08-14 1998-08-14
US09134422 1998-08-14
PCT/US1999/018241 WO2000009108A2 (en) 1998-08-14 1999-08-12 Compositions and uses for vision and memory disorders

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
AU5555699A true AU5555699A (en) 2000-03-06

Family

ID=22463332

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
AU55556/99A Abandoned AU5555699A (en) 1998-08-14 1999-08-12 Compositions and uses for vision and memory disorders

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1105112A2 (en)
JP (1) JP4503180B2 (en)
AU (1) AU5555699A (en)
CA (1) CA2335815A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2000009108A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6218424B1 (en) * 1996-09-25 2001-04-17 Gpi Nil Holdings, Inc. Heterocyclic ketone and thioester compounds and uses
MXPA02001095A (en) * 1999-07-30 2002-08-20 Vertex Pharma Acyclic and cyclic amine derivatives.
CA2386579A1 (en) * 1999-11-12 2001-05-25 Alcon, Inc. Neurophilin ligands for treating ocular conditions
CN1240691C (en) * 2001-12-06 2006-02-08 中国人民解放军军事医学科学院毒物药物研究所 Substituted penta azacylo compounds and their use for preventing and treating nervous retrogression disease

Family Cites Families (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5192773A (en) * 1990-07-02 1993-03-09 Vertex Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Immunosuppressive compounds
KR100244372B1 (en) * 1991-05-09 2000-03-02 조슈아 에스.보저 Novel immunosuppressive compounds
US5859031A (en) * 1995-06-07 1999-01-12 Gpi Nil Holdings, Inc. Small molecule inhibitors of rotamase enzyme activity
US5696135A (en) * 1995-06-07 1997-12-09 Gpi Nil Holdings, Inc. Inhibitors of rotamase enzyme activity effective at stimulating neuronal growth
US6037370A (en) * 1995-06-08 2000-03-14 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Methods and compositions for stimulating neurite growth
US5801197A (en) * 1995-10-31 1998-09-01 Gpi Nil Holdings, Inc. Rotamase enzyme activity inhibitors
WO1997031020A1 (en) * 1996-02-22 1997-08-28 The General Hospital Corporation METHODS AND COMPOSITIONS FOR ENHANCING CELLULAR RESPONSE TO TGF-β LIGANDS
US5801187A (en) * 1996-09-25 1998-09-01 Gpi-Nil Holdings, Inc. Heterocyclic esters and amides
US5786378A (en) * 1996-09-25 1998-07-28 Gpi Nil Holdings, Inc. Heterocyclic thioesters
US5846979A (en) * 1997-02-28 1998-12-08 Gpi Nil Holdings, Inc. N-oxides of heterocyclic esters, amides, thioesters, and ketones
WO1998048784A2 (en) * 1997-04-28 1998-11-05 The University Of British Columbia Method and composition for modulating amyloidosis
US6121280A (en) * 1998-03-24 2000-09-19 Pfizer Inc. Azabicyclic rotomase inhibitors

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1105112A2 (en) 2001-06-13
JP4503180B2 (en) 2010-07-14
CA2335815A1 (en) 2000-02-24
WO2000009108A3 (en) 2000-05-18
JP2002522484A (en) 2002-07-23
WO2000009108A2 (en) 2000-02-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7410995B1 (en) N-linked sulfonamide of heterocyclic thioesters for vision and memory disorders
CA2344520A1 (en) Pipecolic acid derivatives for vision and memory disorders
US6218423B1 (en) Pyrrolidine derivatives for vision and memory disorders
AU5557899A (en) Heterocyclic esters or amides for vision and memory disorders
US6384056B1 (en) Heterocyclic thioesters or ketones for vision and memory disorders
EP1105128A2 (en) Carboxylic acids and isosteres of n-heterocyclic compounds for vision and memory disorders
US6335348B1 (en) Nitrogen-containing linear and azepinyl/ compositions and uses for vision and memory disorders
US6506788B1 (en) N-linked urea or carbamate of heterocyclic thioesters for vision and memory disorders
AU5555699A (en) Compositions and uses for vision and memory disorders
AU5555499A (en) Small molecule carbamates or ureas for vision and memory disorders
US6337340B1 (en) Carboxylic acids and isosteres of heterocyclic ring compounds having multiple heteroatoms for vision and memory disorders
AU5477699A (en) Small molecule sulfonamides for vision and memory disorders
MXPA01000196A (en) Compositions and uses for vision and memory disorders

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MK5 Application lapsed section 142(2)(e) - patent request and compl. specification not accepted